NCC English Notes

Part I (Common Syllabus)
General and NCC Scheme

Section – 1
Ques 1- What is NCC Motto?
Ans - Unity & Discipline.
Ques 2 – What are the aims of NCC?
Ans - (a) To develop character, comradeship, discipline, leadership, secular outlook, spirit of adventure, sportsmanship and ideals
of selfless service among the youth of the country.
(b) To create a human resource of organized, trained and motivated youth, to provide leadership in all walks of life
and always be available for the service of the nation.
(c) To provide a suitable environment to motivate the youth to take up a career in the Armed Forces.
Section – 2
Ques 1 – What is the rank of DG NCC?
Ans – Lt General.
Ques 2 – What is the rank of Dy Director General of NCC Directorate?
Ans - Brigadier.
Ques 3 – How many Directorates are there in NCC?
Ans - 17.
Ques – 4 - What are the ranks of SD/SW ANOs?
Ans – Lt, Capt & Maj.
Ques – 5 - What are the ranks of JD/JW ANOs?
Ans - 3rd Officer, 2nd Officer, First Officer and Chief Officer.
Section – 3
Ques 1. Name various camps conducted in NCC?
Ans - Basically there are two types of camps as under : -
(a) Annual Training camps
(b) Centrally organised camps, which are a under: -
(i) Leadership camps – Advance & Basic leadership camps
(ii) Thal Sainik camps
(iii) Vayu Sainik Camps.
(iv) Rock climbing camps.
(v) National integration camps.
(vi) Republic day camp and Prime Minister‟s rally.
Ques 2 - Name the social service and community development activities?
Ans – These are as under: -
(a) Tree Plantation.
(b) Blood Donation.

(c) Old Age Homes.
(d) Adult Education.
(e) Community work.
(f) Disaster relief.
(g) AIDs and Cancer awareness programmes.
Ques 3. What are the various eligibility conditions for certificate examination?
(a) „A‟ Certificate
(i) The candidate must have attended a minimum of 75% of total training periods laid
down in the syllabus for the first and second years of Junior Division/ Wing NCC (All Wings).
(ii) Must have attended one Annual Training Camp.
„B‟ Certificate
(i) The cadet must have attended a minimum of 75% of total training period laid down in
the syllabus for the first and second years for Senior Division Wing NCC (All Wings).
(ii) Must have attended one Annual Training Camp/NIC.
(iii) Cadets possessing „A‟ certificate will be awarded 10 bonus marks
(iv) An Air Wing Cadet must do a minimum of 10 Glide Launches.
„C‟ Certificate
(i) The candidate must be in possession of Certificate „B‟.
(ii) The cadet must be in third year of SD/SW NCC Training.
(iii) The cadet must have attended a minimum of 75% of the periods of 3rd year
syllabus during the academic session.
(iv) Must have attended Two ATCs or one ATC and in addition one of the following:-
(aa) RD Camp at Delhi (RDC).
(ab) Centrally Organised Camp (COC).
(ac) Para Training Camp (PTC).
(ad) National Integration Camp (NIC) (when applicable for SD/SW Cadets).
(ae) All India Trekking Expedition (DG NCC organised).
(af) All India Mountaineering Expedition (DG NCC organised).
(ag) Attachment Training with Service units.
(ah) Any one of the Adventure Courses approved by DG NCC.
(aj) Sailing Expedition , with actual sailing exceeding 10 days, duly approved by
DG NCC.
(ak) Any cadet participating in National Rifle Association of India (NRAI) matches as
part of DG NCC team.
(al) Special Services Camps (essentially with 50% Service training).
(am) Successfully done Scuba Diving Course.
(an) Youth Exchange Programme.
(ao) Foreign cruise (Navy).

Ques 4. – How is the grading awarded in NCC?
Ans - A cadet has to obtain 45% marks in each paper and 50% marks in the aggregate to pass the
examinations. Grading based on total marks obtained will be awarded as follows:-
(a) Grading À‟ - Cadets obtaining 80% marks or above.
(b) Grading `B‟ - Cadets obtaining 65% marks and above but below 80%.
(c) Grading `C‟ - Cadets obtaining 50% marks and above but below 65%.
(d) Fail - Cadets obtaining less than 45% in any paper or less than 50% of the
aggregate.
Ques 5. Name the retention clothing items and scales of authorisation?
Ans - Authorisation of retention clothing for army boys/Girls is tabulated as under: -
Ser Item Life in Qty Auth per Qty to be retained Remarks

Cdt JD/ JW SD/ SW
No Months
1. Shirt PWPC Khaki 72 02 Prs 02 Prs 02 Prs All wings
Boys/Girls)
2. Trouser PWPC Khaki 72 02 Prs 02 Prs JW 02 Prs All wings (less JD
(Boys/Girls) boys)
3. Short PWPC Khaki 72 02 per JD & 02 per JD 01 Pr SD -
one per SD Army Army
4. Salwar/ Kamiz white 48 02 per 02 Pr JW 02 Pr SW Army Girls Wing
JW/SW only
5. Beret/ Pagree DG 72/24 01 per Cdt 01 per Cdt 01 per Cdt All wings
7. Socks Nylon NTP Black 15 02 per Cdts 02 Prs 02 Prs
8. Shoe Black leather 30 1 Pr per 01 pr per, - Army JD/JW
Derby DMS Army JD & Army JD &
Girls JW Girls JW
9. Shoe Ankle Leather 54 01 pr per - 1 pr per -
DVS Army Army
SD/SW Cdts SD/SW Cdts
10. Shoe canvas 12 01 pr per 01 Pr 01 Pr per One pr for Army,
white/Brown Girl /Army SD/ SW Girls for entire pd
Cdt 01 pr per of 2/3 yrs.
JD/JW Cdt
Note-It must be amended by various Dtes as applicable considering the geographical jurisdiction.
Ques 6. Write the full version of NCC song?
Ans -
NCC Song
Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain, Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain.
Apni Manzil Ek Hai, Ha, Ha, Ha, Ek Hai, Ho, Ho, Ho, Ek Hai
Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain
Kashmir Ki Dharti Rani Hai,
Sartaj Himalaya Hai,
Sadiyon Se Hamne Isko Apne Khoon Se Pala Hai
Desh Ki Raksha Ki Khatir, Hum Shamshir Utha Lenge,
Hum Shamshir Utha Lenga.
Bikhere-Bikhere Tarey Hain Hum Lekin Jhilmil Ek Hai
Ha, Ha, Ha, Ek Hain

Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain,
Mandir Gurdware Bhi Hain Yahan
Aur Masjid Bhi Hai Yahan,
Girja Ka Hai Ghadiyal Kahin
Mullah Ki Kahin Hai Ajaan.
Ek Hi Apna Ram Hai, Ek Hi Allah Taala Hai,
Ek Hi Allah Taala Hai, Rang Birange Deepak Hai Hum,
Lekin Jagmag Ek Hai Ha, Ha, Ek Hai, Ho Ho, Ho, Ek Hai.
Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain, Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain.
Section – 5
Ques 1 – List out various incentives for NCC cadets by centre and state Govts?
A. Concession in employment: -
(a) Vacancies reserved for commission in Defence Forces for NCC `C‟ Certificate: Army 64 per year- Indian Military Academy
(IMA), Dehradun through UPSC and Service Selection Board (SSB) Interview.
100 per year - in Officers Training Academy (OTA), Chennai for Short Service Commission Non Technical No UPSC Exam, only
SSB. Navy -6 per Course. No UPSC Exam, Only Naval SSB.
IAF – 10 % in all courses including Flying Training courses. No UPSC Exam only Air Force SSB.
(b) For ORs, Sailors, Airmen: 5 to 10% bonus marks awarded for recruitment.
(c) Para Military Forces: 2 to 10 bonus marks awarded for recruitment.
(d) Department of Telecommunication: Bonus marks awarded for recruitment.
(e) CRPF NCC Cadets holding third division degree eligible for recruitment to gazetted
post.
(f) National Cadet Corps Civilian Gliding Instructors/Girl Cadet Instructors and NCC WTLOs.
(g) State Governments Preference in State Services in certain States.
(h) Industry Some Industries give preference to NCC „C‟ Certificate holders for various jobs.
B. Concessions by Haryana, HP and Punjab Govt are as under: -
Note-It must be amended by various Dtes as applicable in respective states/UTs.
Haryana:
Preference for recruitment in Home Guard Deptt and State Police Force. Preference for recruitment to State
Police Force.
HP
Weight age for admission to various courses of study in Himachal Pradesh University
Punjab
Weightage of marks given for admission in various courses in State Govt Polytechnics, Colleges and
Universities.
Ques 2. What are the aims and financial assistance provided by cadet welfare society?
Ans - A. Aims of the Society. The present aims of Cadets Welfare Society are:-
(a) To give financial assistance to cadets NOK/nominee in case of a demise during NCC activity.
(b) To give financial relief to cadets on sustaining injury / disability during NCC activity.
(c) To grant scholarships to academically brilliant students.
nd
(d) To grant Best and 2 Best Cadet awards at Group level.
(e) To conduct sports and adventure activities which cannot be funded by Public Funds.
B. Financial Assistance/Relief. The Society is granting financial assistance and relief, as under, to
cadets who sustain injury or death during NCC related activity as well as for sports and adventure
activities.
NCC Related Activities Death Cases Permanent Disability Temporary Disability
High Risk Upto Rs. 2,00,000/ Upto Rs.1,00,000/

Rs. 2 , 0 0, 0 00 / -
Rs. 1 , 5 0, 0 00 / -
Other Activities Upto Rs. 1,50,000/ Upto Rs.1,00,000/
Ques 3. List out various scholarship schemes available for NCC cadets?
A n s - A . S c hol ars hi ps . A sch o larsh ip sch em e wa s in t ro d u ce d in 1 99 1 wh e re 2 5 0

sch o la rsh ip s of Rs. 2 , 00 0 / - ea ch we re a wa rd e d t o a cad em ica lly b rillia n t NCC ca d e t s. T h e
sch e me in it s p re se n t f o rm a wa rds Rs. 5 , 00 0 / - e a ch wh ich a re d ist ribu t e d am on gst t he
1 7 Dt e s ba se d o n t h e ir e n ro lle d stre n gt h of cad e t s.
B. Best Cadet Awards. Best Cadet Cash Awards are given to two cadets from each category i.e. JD, JW, SD, SW
nd
in every Group HQ with Rs 3,000/- to each Best Cadet and Rs. 2,000/- to each 2 Best Cadet. A total of 760 cash
awards are given every year.
C. Sahara Scholarships.
(a) In 2002 the Sahara Group introduced an Annual Sahara Scholarship Scheme with a
corpus fund of Rs 3 Crores. Rs 1 Crores is to be given annually as scholarships to academically
brilliant cadets.
(b) A total of 1016 scholarships with the following breakdown are given as follows:-
Category No. of vacancies per Total Amount per

Group HQ Scholarship
JD 3 285 Rs 6,000/-
JW 3 285 Rs 6,000/-
SD 2 190 Rs 12,000/-
SW 2 190 Rs 12,000/-
Professional A total of 66 66 Rs 30,000/-

Scholarships.
Total 1016
Sign in|Recent Site Activity|Report Abuse|Print Page|Powered By Google Sites
Introduction to Defence Services

ARMED FORCES
SECTION -1
BASIC ORGANIZATION OF ARMED FORCES
Ques 1 - What all major operations have been fought by Indian Army since independence?
Ans - (a) Kashmir Operations against Pakistan 1947-48.
(b) Sino- Indian Operations in NEFA (Arunanchal) and Laddakh 1962.
(c) Indo-Pak war 1965.
(d) Indo - Pak war 1971.
(e) Kargil conflict 1999.
Ques 2 - What are names of Army commands?
Ans - (a) Northern Command
(b) Western, Command
(c) Central Command
(d) Southern Command
(e) South Western Command
(f) Eastern Command
(g) Training Command
Ques 3 - Name the fighting arms?
Ans - (a) Armour
(b) Infantry
(c) Mechanized infantry
Ques 4 - Name the Supporting arms?
Ans - (a) Artillery
(b) Engineers
(c) Army Air Defence
(d) Army Aviation corps
(e) Signals
Ques 5. Name the supporting services of the Army?
Ans (a) Army Services Corps (ASC)
(b) Army Medical Corps (AMC)
(c) Army Ordnance Corps (AOC)
(d) Corps of Electronics and Mechanical Engineers (EME)
(e) Remount and Veterinary Corps (RVC).
(f) Army Education Corps (AEC)
(g) The Intelligence Corps

(h) The Corps of Military Police (CMP)
(h) Judge Advocate General Branch (JAG)
(k) Army Physical Training Corps (APTC)
(l) The Pioneer Corps
(m) Defence Security Corps (DSC)
Ques 6. Name the various commands of the Navy?
Ans - (a) Western Naval Command with HQ at Mumbai.
(b) Eastern Naval Command with HQ at Vishakhapatnam.
(c) Southern Naval Command with HQ at Cochin.
Ques 7. Name the various commands of Air Force?
Ans - (a) Western Air Command.
(b) Central Air Command
( c) Eastern Air Command.
(d) South Western Air Command.
(e) Southern Air Command.
(f) Training Command.
(g) Maintenance Command.
SECTION-2
BADGES AND RANKS
Ques 1 - Name officers' ranks of Army in ascending order.
Ans - (a) Lieutenant
(b) Capt
(c) Major
(d) Lieutenant Colonel
(e) Colonel
(f) Brigadier
(g) Major General
(h) Lieutenant General
(i) General
(j) Field Marshal
Ques 2 - Name officers' ranks of Air Force in descending order.
Ans - (a) Marshal of the Air Force
(b) Air Chief Marshal
(c) Air Marshal
(d) Air Commodore

(e) Group Captain
(f) Wing Commander
(g) Squadron Leader
(h) Flight Lieutenant
(i) Flying Officer
Ques 3 - Name officers' ranks of Navy in ascending order.
Ans - (a) Sub Lieutenant
(b) Lieutenant
(c) Lieutenant Commander
(d) Commander
(e) Captain
(f) Commodore
(g) Rear Admiral
(h) Vice Admiral
(i) Admiral
(j) Admiral of the fleet
SECTION-3
HONOURS AND AWARDS
Ques 1. Name the gallantry awards in the face of the enemy?
Ans - (a) Param Vir Chakra (PVC).
(b) Maha Vir Chakra (MVC).
(c) Vir Chakra.
(d) Sena, Nao Sena and Vayu Sena Medal (SM/NM/VM).
(e) Mention in Dispatches.
(f) Chiefs of Staff Commendation Card.
Ques 2. Name the gallantry awards other than in the face of the enemy?
Ans (a) Ashoka Chakra.
(b) Kirti Chakra.
(c) Shaurya Chakra
Ques 3. Name the NCC awards for NCC personals?
Ans. NCC awards to WTLOs, ANOs,GCIs and NCC Cadets are as under: -
(a) Raksha Mantri's Padak. .
(b) Raksha Mantri's Prashansa Patra.
(c) Raksha Sachiv's Prashansa Patra.
(d) Maha Nideshak's Prashansa Patra. .

(e) Maha Nideshak's Prashansa Patra To Civilian Personnel
SECTION-4
CONCEPT OF COMBINED DEFENCE SERVICES
Ques 1. What is the concept of combined defence services?
Ans. (a) The concept of three dimensional warfare or combined operations
wherein the three wings of the armed forces i.e. Army, Navy and
Air Force, have to operate as a single cohesive force against the enemy,
is the norm of the day.
(b) officers among the three services during various training course, sand model discussion and exercises
at various levels is very useful in understanding the working ethos of other services
(c) Currently Integrated Command having all the three services under its wing is established at Port Blair to institutionalize
the concept of three dimensional warfare
Foot Drill
CHAPTER-III
DRILL
Ques 1. What is the aim of Drill?

Ans - (a) To inculcate a sense of discipline,
(b) Improve bearing, smartness in appearance and turn out,
(c) Create self confidence and
(d) To develop the quality of immediate and implicit obedience to orders.
Ques 2. Word of command ke kitne bhag hote hain?
Ans - (a) Cautionary.
(b) Executive.
Ques 3 - What are the points to be checked in Savdhan?
Ans (a) Heels together and in line, feet turned out equally forming an angle of 30 degrees, knees straight without
stiffness, hips level and drawn back slightly, body erect and resting equally on hips, chest lifted and arched shoulders square, falling
equally and neck filling the collar.
(b) Arms hanging straight down without stiffness so that the thumbs are immediately behind the seams of the trouser, back of the
hand outwards, hands closed (not clenched) and thumbs straight to the front.
(c) Head erect and square to the front, chin vertical and eyes straight to the front.
(d) Weight of the body resting equally on the heels and the toe of the feet.
(e) Bring heels together with extreme sharpness by lifting the left foot six inches from the ground and placing it flat and very firm
besides the right, avoid stamping of foot.
Ques 4. Dehne Mur kitne degree ka hota hai aur ki paon par word of command idya jaata hai?
Ans. 90o degree aur bayen paon par.
Ques 5. Peechhe Mur kitne degree ka hota hai aur ki paon par word of command idya jaata hai?
Ans. 180o degree aur bayen paon par.
Ques 6. Bayen Mur kitne degree ka hota hai aur ki paon par word of command idya jaata hai?
Ans. 90o degree aur dehne paon par.
Ques 7. Squad ko kadd war karne ke liye karwai likho?
Ans. (a) Squad ek line mein.
(b) Squad ek do ki ginti karo.
(c) Ek number ek kadam aage aur do number ek kadam peechhe chal.
(d) Ek number dehne aur do number bayen mur.
(e) Dehna cadet khara rahey baaki teen line banaao, tez chal.
Ques 8. Khuli line chal mein word of command kiya hoga?
Ans. Khuli line chal.
Ques 9. Dressing ka word of command likho?
Ans. Sajj dehne sajj.
Ques 10. Salute kitne parkar ke hain?
Ans. Teen parkar ke:
(a) Saamne ka
(b) Dehne ka
(c) Bayen ka
Ques 11. Saamne ka salute kis paon par diya jaata hai?
Ans. Bayen par.
Ques 12. Dehne ka salute kis paon par diya jaata hai?
Ans. Bayen par.
Ques 13. Saamne ka salute kis paon par diya jaata hai?
Ans. Bayen par.
Ques 14. Word of command 'Parade par'• milte hee squad kitne kadam ke baad tham karta hai?
Ans. 15 Kadam par.
Ques 15. Visarjan mein first turn kis taraf karte hain?
Ans. Dehne taraf.
Ques 16. Normal march karte waqt ek minute mein kitne kadam hote hai?
Ans. 120 Kadam.
Ques 17. Slow march karte waqt ek minute mein kitne kadam hote hai?
Ans. 70 Kadam.
Ques 18. Word of command 'Tez Chal'• mein pehla kadam kitne inch ka hota hai?
Ans. 30 inch ka.
Ques 19. Squad ko dehne ya bayen baaju karne ke liye word of command kiya hoga?
Ans. (a) Squad dehne baaju chal
(b) Squad bayen baaju chal.
(c) Squad aage chal.
(d) Squad peechhe chal
Ques 20. Dehne, bayen, asage aut peechhe chal mein jiayada se jiayada kitne kadam hote hai?
Ans. Teen.
Ques 21. Squad dehne ya bayen baaju chal mein side step kitne inch ka hoga?
Ans. 12 inch ka.
Ques 22. Kadam taal kis liye karvaya jaata hai?
Ans. (a) Warm up karne ke liye
(b) Kadam milane ke liye.
Ques 23. Tej chaal mein kadam taal kis paon par bolte hain?
Ans. Baeyen paon par.
Ques 24. Kaun kaun salute adhikari hote hain?
Ans. Nb Subedar aur uske upar sabhi adhikari.
Arms Drill
CHAPTER-III (A)
DRILL WITH ARMS & CEREMONIAL DRILL
(Only for SD/SW Cadets)
Ques 1. Savdhan position mein rifle kis hath mein hoti hai?
Ans - Dehna Hath.
Ques 2. Aaram se position mein rifle kahan hoti hai?
Ans. Rifle ka butt dehne paon ke sath aur rifle aage ki taraf jhuki hui.
Ques 3. Rifle ko tol sashar mein kab kiya jaata hai?
Ans. Sameekhsha karam mein chalte waqat.
Ques 4. Bhumi sashtra mein rifle ka barrel kis disha mein hota hai?
Ans. Aage ki taraf.
Ques 5. Bhumi sashtra meion rifle ka magazine kis disha mein hota hai?
Ans. Dehne taraf.
Ques 6. Bagal sashtra ke hukam par kia karwai hoti?
Ans. Dehne haath se rifle ko upar uchhalo, baen haath se fore hand guard, Dehne haath se
piston grip pakro. Rifle 900 angle par body ke saath lagaen, dehne haath se mazboot pakro, baey haath ko savdhan position men
lao.
Ques 7. Baazu sashtra mein rifle kahan hoti hai?
Ans. Rifle neeche, butt dehen toe ke sath aur 900 par hoti hai.
Ques 8. Salami sashtra kin kin ranks ko laagu hota hai?
Ans. Major aur upar ke ranks ko.
Ques 9. National salute kis ko laagu hota hai?
Ans. President and Governers of states.
Ques 10. General salute kis ko laagu hai?
Ans. Major General and above.
Ques 11. Guard of honour kis kis ko laagu hota hai?
Ans. Senior Division Units may provide guards of honour to the following:-
(a) The president, Vice President and the Prime Minister.
(b) The Governors of states and Lt Governor/Chief commissioners of Union Territories.
(c) The Defence Minister / Minister in the Ministry of Defence / Deputy Defence Minister.
(d) The Chief Minister of State.
(e) The Chief of Army /Naval /Air Staff.
(f) The Defence Secretary.
(g) The General Officer commanding-in-Chief of the command in which the Unit is located (Army Wing Units only).
(h) The Flag officer Commanding-in-chief within their Commands (Naval wing units only).
(j) The Air Officer Commanding-in-Chief, within their commands (Air Wing Units only).
(k) The Vice chief of Army/Naval/Air Staff.
(l) The Dignitaries addressing the convocation of a University.
(m) Chancellor of a University (where Governor of the State is not the Chancellor).
(n) Pro-Chancellor/Vice Chancellor of a
University when attending important university functions as Chief guest in their University.
(o) Director General NCC.
Ques 12 - Gaurd of honour ki nafri likho?
Ans - The strength of the Guard of Honour will be as follow:-
(a) 150 rank and file for the President (will be formed up in 3 equal division).
(b) 100 rank and file for the Vice President and Prime Minister (will be formed up in two equal division).
Weapon Training
SECTION-1
CHARACTERISTICS OF .22 RIFLE , STRIPPING, ASSEMBLING,
CARE AND CLEANING AND SIGHT SETTING
Ques 1. What are the major characteristics of Rif .22 No MK-II, MK IV and Deluxe BA?
Ans - The major characteristics of Rifle .22 No MK-II, MK IV and Deluxe BA are :-
Ser Details Rifle .22 No II MK IV BA Rifle .22 Deluxe BA

No
(a) Length 45•" 43"•
(b) Weight 8 Lbs 10 ½ OZ 6 LBs 2 OZ
(c) Magzine Capacity 10 Rounds 05 Rounds
(d) Muzzle Velocity 2700 per sce 2700 per sec
(e) Grooves in the barrel 06 06
(f) Effective Range 25 yds 25 yds
(g) Max Range 1700 yds at 33 angle 1700 yds at 33 angle
(h) Calibre .22 .22
(j) Ammunition .22 .22
(k) Rate of fire :-
(i) Normal 05 Rds pm 05 Rds pm
(ii) Rapid 10-15 Rds pm 10-15 Rds pm
Ques 2 - What points must be kept in mind while assembling Rif .22?
Ans - (a) Bolt head to be fully tight.
(b) Bolt head and guide rib as well as cocking piece and steel lug to be in a line.
(c) Number of the bolt should tally with that of the rifle.
(d) Safety catch should be applied.
SECTION-2
LOADING, COCKING AND UNLOADING
Ques 1. What is the drill for loading and unloading in the lying position for Rif .22?
Ans - (a) To lie down, take a long pace forward with the left foot and at the same time pass the rifle into left hand, grasping it at the
point of balance. Place the right hand on to the ground in line with the left foot. During this movement push the rifle forward and lower
to the ground. The left arm will now be extended to the front. The legs will be well apart. Now load the rifle as taught.
(b) Unload the rifle without further orders. Place the right hand on the ground below the right shoulder. Draw up the left hand. Stand
up as quickly as possible.
SECTION-3
LYING POSITION AND HOLD
Ques 1. What are the three basic essentials of good shooting?
Ans - (a) Position must be comfortable and hold so firm that the rifles gains a rock like steadiness.
(b) The firer must aim correctly.
(c) The trigger be pressed in such a way that aim is not disturbed.
Ques 2. What are the characteristics of good lying position?
Ans (a) Legs opened wide apart and body slanting to the left from the line of the target.
(b) Formation of the two triangles:-
(i) Horizontal triangle formed by the three points where the chest leaves the ground, the left elbow and the right elbow. (Fig
1)
(ii) Vertical triangle as viewed form the front of firer the two of its sides are formed by the forearms, the base being the
ground between elbows. In addition as a quick check, the shoulders should be level (Fig-2)
SECTION 4
AIMING I - RANGE AND TARGETS
(Only for JD/JW Cadets)
Ques 1. Define laws of aiming?
Ans - (a) Focus the target so that a clear picture is formed on the retina of the eye and get the true centre of the target. Then with the
eye focus to the foresight.
(b) Hold the rifle properly as has already been taught and keep it upright.
(c) Close the left eye and focus the foresight.
(d) See the foresight through the black sight. The foresight should be seen right in the centre of the U. The tip of the foresight must be
aligned in the centre and in level with the shoulder of the U.
Ques 2. What are the targets used for firing with Rif .22?
Ans (a) For application firing 1' x 1' target is used. The aim is to be taken at the bull which is the black, centre most circle.
(b) For grouping, 1' x 1' target with a white patch in the centre of the bull is used.
(c) For rapid firing, 6 inches figure target is used. The aim is taken at the centre of the figure.
SECTION-5
TRIGGER CONTROL AND FIRING A SHOT
Ques 1. What are essentials of good shooting?
Ans - (a) Determination. Accurate shooting is never achieved without concentration, each time a shot is fired the
firer must be fully determined that it is going to be perfect one.
(b) Turning the Shot. From the time correct holding is achieved, more than five seconds should not be taken to fire a
shot. Dwelling on the aim cause the eye and muscles to tire and results in bad shooting.
(c) Action on Range Being Ordered. When the 'range' is given the firer
should adjust his sights and await for indication of the target.
Ques 2. What is the sequence of action while firing a shot?
Ans - (a) Aiming Position. On taking the aim, the firer must take the first pressure.
(b) Breathing. Just before taking an aim, breathing must be gently
restrained. It is important to coordinate so that when the foresight comes to the point of aim, the breath is partially
exhaled.
(c) Firing. Immediately on 'correct aim' the second pressure will be taken and shot fired. For a second or two
after firing, there should be no relaxation of the hold or movement of trigger finger or head.
(d) Follow Through. The hold and aim must be maintained until the bullet has left the barrel. Better still fire
should allow through until the bullet has reached the target.
SECTION-6
RANGE PROCEDURE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Ques 1. What is the is the normal procedure on the firing points?

Ans - It is as udner :-
(a) The party to fire is brought within about 100 yds of the firing point.
(b) The practices to be fired are explained.
(c) Firers are detailed to targets.
(d) The coaches, ammunition party and look out men take up their positions.
(e) The first two details only form up behind their targets.
(f) On the order of 'Age Barh' (Detail Advance) the first detail will take position on the firing point.
(g) On the lowering of the red flag at the butt, the officer supervising the firing point may order his red flag to be taken down and
give the order of 'Detail Advance'. The coaches check up their positions and correct them if needed, and give the word of command
'Limber Up'. On this, the firers must align rifles as they have been taught. The officer will then give the order to load and carry on.
(h) The firing will start only after getting orders from officer-in-charge firing.
(j) On completion of fire, the firers must raise their right hand up, keeping the elbow on the ground.
(k) Officer-in-charge will give the word of command 'Khali Kar' (before this he must ensure that all have finished). On this the
firers will take their rifles onto their shoulders and move the bolt twice, press the trigger and stand up.
(l) The officer-in-charge will give the command 'Detail Report' on this the firers would report 'Number ek rifle theek, do theek,
teen theek and number char rifle theek'. The report will be form left to right. (Normally four targets are used on miniature range).
(m) The first and last firer will say 'Number ek rifle theek' and the rest will say 'Do theek, teen theek' and so on.
(n) The details are changed by word of command and the new detail which has been waiting comes up while another detail forms
up behind.
(o) Before the firers leave the range they will have a further weapon inspection. Each firer will be asked whether she has any live
ammunition. It will be ensured that they have no live ammunition.
SECTION -7
AIMING II - ALTERATION OF SIGHT
(Only for SD/SW cadets)
Ques 1. What is Mean Point of Impact (MPI)?
Ans - The central point of area covered by the group of rounds fired with consistent aim and held at the same aiming mark is called MPI.
Ques 2. What is the elevation at different ranges?
Ans - (a) The amount of alteration necessary may be found from the following table which shows the change of MPI when the
sight is changed by 100 yards.
Range Target Rise or drop of MPI on Target

200 Yards 6 inches
300 Yards 12 inches
400 Yards 18 inches
500 Yards 24 inches
rds in the sight will bring half the effect shown above. 200 yards will double it on the target.
SECTION-8
THEORY OF GROUP AND SNAP SHOOTING
Ques 1. What is grouping capacity?
Ans - The diameter of a circle containing all five shots, fired by a man to the best of his ability, is known as his grouping capacity.
Ques 2. What are the main points to be observed during snap shooting?
Ans - (a) Accuracy is not sacrificed for speed.
(b) There is no verbal declaration of aim, since this would cause distraction.
(c) The butt remains in the shoulder in order to save time in re-aiming.
(d) Perfect bolt manipulation to ensure that no time is wasted in reloading.
(e) Firing will continue until such time as the command 'Stop' is given, or no further fire is required.
Map Reading
SECTION-1
INTRODUCTION TO MAP AND
CONVENTIONAL SIGNS
Ques 1. What is a map?
Ans - A map is representation of selected natural and man made features of the whole or part ofthe earth's surface on a
flat sheet of paper on a definite scale and in their correct relative geographic positions and elevations.
Ques 2. What is conventional sign?
Ans - Conventional signs are symbols used to represent certain artificial or natural features/ objects on the map. They are seldom drawn to
scale.
SECTION-2
SCALES
Ques 1 - What is scale?
Ans - By scale it means the proportion which the distance between two points on the map bears to the distance between the same two points
on the ground
Ques 2. What are the common scales used in survey of India maps?
Ans - (a) 16 inches to 1 Mile 1/3960
(b) 4 inches to 1 mile 1/15840
(c) 2.53 inches to 1 mile 1/25000
(d) 1 inch to 1 mile 1/63360
(e) Â½ inch to 1 mile 1/126720
(f) Â¼ inch to 1 mile 1/253440
(g) 16 miles to 1 inch (Approx) 1/1000000
(h) 32 miles to 1 inch (Approx) 1/2000000
SECTION 3
TOPOGRAPHICAL FORMS AND TECHNICAL TERMS
Ques 1. Define important technical terms used in map reading?
Ans (a) Bearing - The angle formed by a line joining two points and the North and South line.
Bearings are always measured clockwise.
(b) Bench Mark - A permanent mark usually cut into a wall recording exact height for future
reference, marked BM with the height on Ordnance Survey Maps.
(c) Contours - A line drawn on the map joining up all points of equal height above
sea level.
(d) Gradient - The slope of a hill expressed as a fraction.
(e) Grid Lines - Lines running parallel to and at right angles to a North and South
line through approximately the centre of the area covered by the grid system.
(f) Grid North - Except through the origin, grid lines do not lie true North and South or
East and West, Grid North is the direction of the North South grid lines on a map.
(g) Magnetic - The difference between true North & Magnetic Variation North.
(h) Setting - Placing a map so that North on the map points toward the North so that the
objects on the map are placed in relationship to the same objects on the ground.
(j) Trig Point - A point fixed during the triangulation at the beginning of a survey, marked on
Ordance Survey Maps by a small triangle with the height.
(k) True North - The direction of the North Pole from the point.
Ques 2. Define important Topographical terms used in map reading?
Ans . (a) Basin - An area of fairly level ground surrounded by hills or the area drained by a river
and its distributaries.
(b) Col or Saddle - A narrow ridge of high land joining up to higer hills.
(c) Crest - The highest part of a hill or mountain range. It is that line on a range of hills or
mountains from which the ground slopes down in opposite directions.
(d) Dead Ground - Ground which by reason of undulations or hills is not visible to the
observer.
(e) Defile - Any feature whether natural or artificial which could cause a body of troops to
contract its front. An example of a natural defile is mountain pass while a bridge is an
example of an artificial defile.
(f) Escarpment - The steep hill side formed by a sudden drop in the general ground level
usually from a plateau.
(g) Knoll - A small isolated hill.
(h) Plateau - A table land, an elevated region of considerable extent generally fairly level.
(j) Ridge - The line along a hill or range of hills or mountains from which water flows in
opposite directions, a divide, sometimes and the crest of a line of hills as it appears along
the horizon.
(k) Watershed - The line separating the water flowing into two different river systems, the
edge of a river basin.
SECTION-4
THE GRID SYSTEM
Ques 1 - Define grid line?
Ans - A map is covered with a net work of purple lines, some running North and South and other West and East. These form a series of small
squares all over the map. These lines are known as 'Grid Lines'•.
Ques 2 - What are the basic rules for giving grid reference?
Ans - (a) A reference must always contain an even number of figures. In the normal method, it
will contain six figures.
(b) Always count along the EASTING lines first from WEST to EAST and then from
SOUTH to NORTH, along NORTHINGS.
th
(c) For the six figures reference, the third and the sixth figure represent the divisions of 1000 yards square to the nearest 10 part, so
they have to be estimated and for these figures a slight latitude is allowed.
(d) If a general grid reference is to be given or there is only one such object in one
square e.g. bridge, temple, road, junction, then a four figure grid reference would suffice.
SECTION 5
RELIEF CONTOURS AND GRADIENTS
Ques 1 - Define Relief?
Ans - Relief is a name used to describe the rise and fall of the ground or in other words the hills and valleys.
Ques 2 - Define Vertical interval, Horizontal equivalent and gradient.
Ans - (a) Vertical Interval(VI) - The rise between successive contour lines is known as the
vertical interval. On map scale 1 inch to 1 mile, the VI of each contour line is 50 feet while
on the Â¼ inch to a mile it is 250 feet.
(b) Horizontal Equivalent - The distance measured flat on the map between adjacent contour lines is horizontal equivalent (HE).
(c) Gradient - A gradient is a slope expressed as a fraction. If we say that a slope has a gradient of 1 inch to 7 we mean for every 7
feet of horizontal distance the slope rises or falls 1 foot vertically. Simple Formula is VI/HE = Gradient. The horizontal equivalent is
obtained by measuring on the map and vertical interval by subtracting the contour heights.
SECTION 6
CARDINAL POINTS AND FINDING NORTH
Ques 1 - What are various types of North?
Ans - (a) True North - The direction of North pole from the observer.
(b) Magnetic North- It is the point to which an accurate compass needle points, when
freely suspended.
(c) Grid North - It is the direction to which the North South grid lines on a map point.
SECTION-7
TYPE OF BEARINGS AND USE OF SERVICE PROTRACTOR

Ques 1 - Define various types of bearings?
Ans - (a) Bearing - The clock wise angle formed by a straight line joining two points and direction of NORTH, is called the bearing
between the two points. A bearing is always measured clockwise.
(b) Grid Bearing. Measured on the map from the Grid North by the help of a protractor.
(c) Magnetic Bearing. Measured from Magnetic North by the compass.
(d) True Bearing. Calculated by finding out the relation of true NORTH and Grid NORTH or Magnetic NORTH.
Ques 2. How too convert magnetic bearing to a True bearing?
Ans - Suppose the bearing of a certain point P is measured with a compass and is found to be 160 Degrees. First draw a vertical line to
represent Magnetic North (because it is a magnetic bearing which is being considered). Next draw a line to P at an angle of 160 degrees. It is
only a rough diagram, and the angle can be judged by eye. Thirdly, draw in the true North line approximately 11 degrees East of Magnetic
North, with this diagram it becomes clear that true bearing (marked with a dotted line) is smaller by 11 degrees. Therefore, the true bearing of
P is 149 degrees.
Ques 3. How too convert magnetic bearing to a True bearing?
Ans - Measuring with a protractor on the map, the bearing of a Wind Mill at Y from a Church at Xis found to be 120 degrees. To convert this
grid bearing to a magnetic bearing, draw a diagram as under, this time starting with the Grid North line. Since the magnetic bearing is larger
than the grid bearing by 11 degrees and it is therefore 131 degrees.
Ques 4. What are the usage of service protector?
Ans - (a) Plot and measure bearing on paper or on a map. For bearing between 0 and 180 degrees their Zero edge must be on the
LEFT and for 180 degrees -360 degrees it must be on the RIGHT.
th
(b) Measure distance in inches correct unto 1/100 .
(c) Measure distance in yards, meters or miles on a map by using the appropriate scale.
(d) For using the diagonal scale one must use an intermediate agent. Mark off the distance to be measured on the straight edge of a
paper or by means of a divider and then put the paper or divider on the diagonal scale and measure.
SECTION-8
PRISMATIC COMPASS, ITS USE AND
INTRODUCTION TO GPS
Ques 1. What are the types of compass?
Ans - Compass is of two types as under : -
(a) Dry Type
(b) Liquid Type
Ques 2. What are the various parts of a liquid compass?
Ans These are as under: -
Ques 3. What is Global Positioning System (GPS)?
Ans GPS is a system of satellites and receivers that allows people and devices to pin point their precise location on the earth. The normal GPS
operational constellation consists of 24 satellites that orbit the earth in 12 hours.
Ques 4. What are the usage of GPS?
Ans - (a) Used by fishermen and hikers.
(b) Used by civilian & para military vehicles to navigate their route.
(c) Used by defense aircrafts, ships and specialized vehicles.
(d) Used in defense in battle fields and insurgency-affected areas.
(e) It assists troops to navigate in thick jungles, mountains and deserts.
(f) GPS is also used to guide missiles to pre specified targets.
SECTION-9
SETTING A MAP, FINDING OWN POSITION AND NORTH
Ques 1. When is a map is considered to be set?
Ans - A map is said to be set or oriented when it is placed such that it corresponds directly with the ground i.e. when true NORTH on the map
points to true NORTH on the ground.
Ques 2. What are the various methods to find North?
Ans - (a) Watch method.
(b) By stars
(c) From Idgah & Mosque
(d) From Sun
(e) Compass
(f) GPS
SECTION-10
MAP TO GROUND
Ques 1. What are the methods used to identify objects from Map to ground?
Ans - (a) Bearing and Distance Method. With the help of bearing and distance, find out own position. Find out the distance of the
object to be identified on ground with the help of a scale on the map. Using service protractor, find out the bearing of the object and
convert it into magnetic bearing. Set the magnetic bearing on compass and look for the object in the given bearing. Estimating the
distance on ground, the object will be identified.
(b) Direction and Distance Method. Draw a line on the map between own position and object to be identified. Calculate its distance
and using any of the following methods find the direction of the object:-
(i) With the help of a sight rule find the ground direction of the object.
(ii) With the help of two points on the map estimate the ground direction.
(iii) Place a foot ruler /pencil at own position and align it with line of the map.
(iv) Place a pin each at own position and at the object on the map. Align both
pins and find general direction.
(c) By Estimation Method. In this method measuring bearing, distance and direction, object is identified with the help of other details
in the proximity of the object.
SECTION-11
GROUND TO MAP
Ques 1. What is the intersection method of identifying objects from ground to map?
Ans - Intersection Method. To find out the objects which are at a larger distance or in hilly terrain, intersection method is used. In this method
help of minimum two prominent objects are taken which can be easily identified on the ground. Lines are drawn from the prominent objects to
the object to be identified on map. This method is used when we cannot estimate exact distance. Intersection is done in two ways:-
(a) By Compass Bearing. Take the bearing of the object from two known prominent objects. Draw the lines on the map. The object
will be in the proximity of the intersection of the two lines. Magnetic bearing is found by two methods:-
(i) By Compass. Take the forward bearing from known object.
(ii) By Back Bearing. In war, in case we intercept the enemyâ€™s transmission, with the help of the fall of the shot we can
find out the location by working out back bearing.
SECTION-12
POINT TO POINT MARCH
Ques 1. What is night march?
Ans - When a navigation party moves at night with the help of compass and night march chart, this is called night march.
Ques 2. What all items are required by navigation party?
Ans - (a) Set compass as per bounds.
(b) Luminous stick.
(c) White cloth.
(d) Marching chart.
(e) White lime/ chalk.
(f) Stone pebbles for measuring steps.
(g) Frosted torch.
Ques 3. What is the composition of navigation party?
Ans - (a) Guide. He carries a luminous stick and a compass set to a given bearing.
(b) Assistant Guide. He has a white piece of cloth at his back for identification and a stick to measure depth of nala / pits.
(c) Recorder. He carries additional compass already set on given bearing, night march chart and stone pebbles. He measures the
distance.
(d) Scouts. Number of scouts could be from 2 to 4 depending upon the route and tasks.
Ques 4. What points should be kept in mind by all members of navigation party?
Ans - (a) While marching do not cough, talk or make any noise.
(b) While marching keep inter person distance in mind.
(c) Party must ensure safety and security.
(d) Smoking / using any kind of light is strictly prohibited.
(e) To read night march chart use frosted torch.
Leadership
LEADERSHIP
Section 1- Motivation
Ques 1. Define motivation?
Ans. (a) Motivation is the process by which one is inspired to act in the desired manner with the help of catalytic persuasion.
(b) It is the application of will power and is expressed commonly as a desire, wish, need, preference, want or striving.
(c) It is an act of inspiring men to do their jobs.
Ques 2. What are the various means of motivation?
Ans (a) Integrating as far as possible the personal needs of the men with the needs of the organization.
(b) Providing opportunity where practicable for individuals to participate in establishing goals and standards of
performance. Such participation fosters ready acceptance of objective.
(c) The leader himself setting a personal example of optimum performance. In doing everything, it is better to check up ones
conduct and to act on lines laid down by sages. You, who are a leader of men, must set the example• - BHAGVAD GITA.
SECTION 2- DISCIPLINE AND DUTIES OF A GOOD CITIZEN

Ques 1. Define Duty?
Ans. Duty is a moral/legal obligation and a binding force of what is right and behaviour towards superior colleagues & subordinates.
Ques 2. Define Discipline?
Ans - To obey man's order as issued by rightful authority is discipline. Discipline welds together the other qualities of self control,
courage, endurance, alertness, comradeship and correct behaviour at all times.
Ques 3. Define Citizen?
Ans - A member of a particular community who owes allegiance to the State and who enjoys protection and the rights granted by the
Constitution of the country.
Ques 4. What are the important duties of a good Citizen?
Ans - (a) Primary duty is to be loyal and owe allegiance to the State.
(b) Patriotism, Preservation of Independence of the Country.
(c) Service before Self.
(d) Sense of Duty.
(e) Care and protection of the government property.
(f) High Character.
(g) A good citizen considers right of other citizens also as important as his own right.
SECTION 3- LEADERSHIP TRAITS

Ques 1. What are Leadership traits?
Ans - These area as under : -
(a) Alertness
(b) Bearing
(c) Courage
(d) Decisiveness
(e) Dependability
(f) Endurance
(g) Initiative
(h) Integrity
(i) Judgement
(j) Justice
(k) Knowledge
(l) Loyalty
(m) Sense of humour
(n) Tactful
(o) Unselfishness
SECTION 4- PERSONALITY/ CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT

Ques 1. Write measures for development of Personality?
Ans . These are as under: -
(a) Judgement
(b) Mirroring
(c) Be cheerful and nice
(d) Be sincere and trustworthy.
(e) Provide compelling ideas.
(f) Conviction
(g) Positive attitude.
(h) Leadership skills
(i) Communication skills
Ques 2 . Write measures to improve character?
Ans . These are as under: -
(a) Courage.
(b) Decisiveness.
(c) Initiative.
(d) Enthusiasm.
(e) Loyalty.
(f) Justice.
(g) Morality.
(h) Sense of Duty.
(j) Patriotism.
Ques 3. List out role of NCC in personality/ character development?
Ans. These are as under: -
(a) Drill
(b) Interaction of cadets during camps.
(c) Competitions
(d) Sports and adventure activities.
SECTION 5- TYPES OF LEADERSHIP

Ques 1. Write three ideal leadership styles?
Ans- (a) Autocratic
(b) Democratic
(c) Laissez Faire
SECTION 6- VALUES / CODE OF ETHICS
Ques 1. Define value.
Ans - Value is a standard behaviour of an individual in society.
Ques 2. Define Ethics.
Ans. Ethics is a set of moral principles that governs a person's behaviour in society.
Ques 3. List out important values of a good & successful leader?
Ans - These are as under : -
(a) Honesty - not to steal, cheat or lie.
(b) Integrity - uprightness.
(c) Purity - no duplicity, insincerity in thought, word or deed.
(d) Discipline - behaviour according to essential rules and norms
which is self-imposed.
(e) Selflessness - unselfishness, rise above selfish or self-centered
individualism, self-sacrifice.
(f) Loyalty - true, faithful to duty, love or obligation to person/
institution, faithful in allegiance to the nation or
mother country.
(g) Fairness - being impartial, give right decision.
(h) Equality - treat everyone equally.
(j) Trust - firm belief in the reliability, ability, strength of some
one or something.
(k) Support - give help, encouragement, or approval.
(l) Respect - a feeling of admiration for someone because of their
qualities.
SECTION 7- PERCEPTION
Ques 1. Define Perception?
Ans. Perception is a complicated interaction of selection, organization, and interpretation of stimuli.
Ques 2. Define two elements of perception?
Ans - (a) Perception is a process of selection or screening which prevents us from processing irrelevant or disruptive information
and
(b) There is organisation of stimuli implying that the information that is processed has to be ordered and classified in some
logical manner which permits us to assign meaning to the stimuli situations.
Ques 3. What are the External attention factors of perceptual selection?
Ans. (a) Intensity
(b) Size
(c) Contrast
(d) Repetition
(e) Motion
(f) Novelty and familiarity
SECTION 8- COMMUNICATION INCLUDING INTER-PERSONAL COMMUNICATION

Ques 1. Define communication?
Ans - (a) Communication is an exchange of facts, ideas, options, emotions by two or more persons• or
(b) Communication is an intercourse by words, letter, symbols or messages and a way that one member shares meaning and
understanding with another•.
Ques 2. Write down principles of effective communication.
Ans. These are as under : -
(a) Clarity of Objective
(b) Proper Messenger.
(c) Knowledge of Communicatee.
(d) Selection of Media / Method
(e) Removal of Barriers:
(f) Feedback.
Ques 3. What are the advantages & disadvantages of Face-to-Face interpersonal communication?
Ans Advantages
(a) Once contact is made with audience, there is no time lag between the transmission of a message and its reception.
(b) It gives control to the speaker. In a personal contact one has much more command over the receiver's attention. The listener at
least has to pretend to pay attention. In such cases message ought to be clear and interesting enough to capture the attention of the
audience.
(c) It permits instantaneous feedback. Because of the tremendous amount of feedback available in face-to-face communication,
it has also been termed the richest kind of communication channel.
(d) A final advantage of face-to-face interaction is its personal quality. When a personal meeting goes well, the relationship that
communication develops can help solve problems that might have been more difficult when handled from a distance. Personal
meetings are especially important in some cultures, where failure to visit someone in person is an insult.
Drawbacks
(a) It is difficult to arrange personal meetings. Even when communicator is in the same building, scheduling a meeting can be
difficult and frustrating.
(b) A personal encounter might also be unproductive if the contact antagonizes one or more of the participants.
Ques 4. What are the guidelines for effective listening?
(a) A good listener shows deep interest in the speaker by looking at him. He observes the gestures, facial expressions and
postures of the speaker.
(b) While listening exercise mental discipline over yourself. Only if you concentrate properly can you be a good listener.
(c) Do not allow yourself to be distracted by noise or entering of late comers.
(d) Do not distract the speaker.
(e) Be present in time at the venue. It enables to settle yourself physically and mentally before the speech starts.
(f) Take the efforts to listen not only to the words but also to the feelings being conveyed by the speaker.
(g) Don't hesitate to ask the questions to clarify meaning of statements made by the speaker.
(h) Let your listening always be sympathetic, alert and active. Try to understand the speaker's point of view.
(j) Follow the trend of discussion so as to make the proper response when your turn comes.
(k) Use the extra time you get as listener to analyse and evaluate the speech.
(l) Avoid thinking too much about a part that has already been covered by the speaker as this will prevent you from
paying attention to the next argument.
(m) Don't take too many notes because you will get little time to analyse and evaluate the message or speech.
(n) Avoid emotional barriers which prevent your from listening effectively.
Ques 5. What are the advantages of good listening?
(a) It improves the quality of communication and makes people respect the view point of others.
(b) Good listening leads to positive attitudes, cordial relations and better participation.
(c) It provides valuable information for the purpose of decision making.
(d) Good listening enables to find the solutions to the complex problems.
SECTION 11-IMPORTANCE OF GROUP/TEAM WORK

Ques 1. What are the various types of Groups?
Ans - Classification of group according to evolutions of primary goals is an given below:-
(a) Friendship Group. It evolves informally to meet its members' personal security, esteem and belonging needs.
(b) Task Group. It is created by the management to accomplish certain organization goals. Task group can further be classified
as under:-
(i) Formal Groups. They are established by an organization to facilitate the achievement of the organization goals.
(ii) Informal Group. It is one that develops out of the day-to-day activities, interactions and sentiments of the members
for the purpose of meeting their social needs.
(iii) Effective Group. An effective group is one which has the following characteristics:-
(aa) Its members know why the group exists; they have shared goals.
(ab) Its members support agreed upon guidelines and procedures for making decisions.
(ac) Its members communicate freely among themselves.
(ad) Its members have learned to receive help from one another and to give help to one another.
(ae) Its members have learned to deal with conflict within the group.
(af) Its members have learned to diagnose individual and group processes and improve their own and the group's
functioning.
Ques 2. What are the characteristics of a mature Group?
Ans - (a) An increasing ability to be self directed (not dependent on the leader).
(b) An increased tolerance that progress takes time.
(c) An increasing sensitivity to their own feelings and those of others.
(d) Improvement in the ability to withstand tension, frustration and disagreement.
(e) A perception of the common denominators, which bind the group as well as areas of individual difference.
(f) A better ability to anticipate realistic results of behavior to channel emotions into more socially acceptable ways of expressing
these emotions.
(g) An increased ability to change plans and methods as new situations develop.
(h) A decrease in time needed to recover from threatening group situations. Peaks and valleys of emotional group crises
become less personal.
(j) Increased efficiency in locating problems, engaging in problem solving and providing help to individuals as needed.
(k) A willingness to face one`s own responsibilities and to assist others when help is needed.
(l) An acceptance of the right of the other person to be different.
Ques 3. What are various types of teams?
Ans - (a) Functional Teams
(b) Problem Solving Teams.
(c) Cross - Functional Teams.
(d) Self - Managed Teams.
Ques 4. What are the characteristics of a Team?
Ans - (a) Illusion of invulnerability.
(b) Collective rationalization.
(c) Unquestioned belief.
(d) Stereotypical views.
(e) Direct pressure.
(f) Self censorship.
(g) Shared illusion of unanimity.
Civil Defence
Civil Defence organisation and its Duties
Ques 1 -Define civil defence?
Ans - It is a measure adopted by the civilian population, Government, local self bodies and voluntary organisation etc, during the war to
minimize the effects of enemy action on men and material. It is the defence of the citizens by the citizens.
Ques 2. What is the organisation of civil defence at District level?
Ans - District Magistrate is controller along with in charge for various civil defence services like Civil Surgeon, Superintendent of Police, PWD
Engineer, Publicity officer etc.
Ques 3 - Write various kinds of civil defence services?
Ans - (a) Headquarters Service
(b) Warden's Service
(c) Fire Fighting Service
(d) Casualty Services
(e) Communication Services
(f) Training Services
(g) Rescue Services
(h) Welfare Services
(j) Depot and Transport Services
(k) Salvage Service.
(l) Corpse Disposal Service
(m) Supply Service
SECTION -2
Types of emergencies and natural disasters
Ques 1 -Define disaster?
Ans - Disaster denotes any odd event natural or man made which brings about immense misery to a region and it becomes difficult to cope up
with the situation through local resources. There are two types of disasters i.e. Natural and Man made.
Ques 2 - What are the natural disasters?
Ans
(a) Wind Related - Storm, Cyclone, Tornado, Storm surge and Tidal waves.
(b) Water Related - Flood, Cloudburst, Flash flood, Excessive rains and
Drought.
(c) Earth Related - Earthquake, Tsunamis, Avalanches, Landslides and Volcanic eruptions.
Ques 3. What are the man made disaters?
Ans (a) Accidents. Road, Rail, Air, Sea and Building collapse.
(b) Industrial Mishaps. Gas Leak, explosion, sabotage and safety breach.
(c) Fire. Building, Coal and Oil.
(d) Forest Fire. In tropical countries forest fires are often manmade.
(e) Contamination/Poisoning. Food, water, illicit-liquor and epidemics.
(f) Terrorists Activities.
(g) Ecological. Pollution (air, water, noise), soil degradation, loss of biodiversity, global warming, sea level rise, toxic
wastes and nuclear accidents.
(h) Warfare. Conventional, chemical and nuclear.

Ques 4 - Describe Earth quack, Tsunami, Draught and Flood.
Ans (a) Earthquake. Layers of rock make up the earth's surface. Rocks do not bend or break easily. Tension caused by
movement of Earth's plates, build up over the years until the rocks can take the strain no longer. Suddenly they crack and shift,
sending out shock waves, and reducing anything built on the surface to rubble. This is what we call an earthquake. The shock
of the initial earthquake may be followed by a series of aftershocks over the next few days. These fade as the rocks
settle down into their new positions.
(b) Tsunamis. This giant wave is caused by an undersea earthquake. Vibrations rush through the
ocean at hundreds of kilometers an hour. When they reach shallow waters they slow down and build up into vast waves, at
times 76m (250 ft) tall. The tsunami crashes onto the shore, sweeping away anything in its way.
(c) Drought. If, over about two weeks, there is less than 0.2 mm (1/100in) of
precipitation, there is said to be a drought. Without reservoirs, there is not enough water for people
and crops. Some places have extreme drought which lasts for many years. Droughts have disastrous and long term impact on
the economy and can affect a large segment of the society which may last for months and in some cases several years. Generally,
drought situation may be defined as a temporary reduction in water or moisture availability significantly below the normal or expected
amount for a specific period. Drought is a slow onset phenomenon.
(d) Flood. It can arise from abnormally heavy precipitation, dam failures, rapid snow melting, river blockages or even burst water
mains. It is usually sudden in onset. Types of floods can further be classified into Inland and Coastal floods. Major floods result in
physical damage, deaths and injuries, problems in drinking water supply and food shortages and displacement of population.
SECTION -3
Fire Fighting
Ques 1 -What are the three elements for fire?
Ans - (a) Oxygen.
(b) Sufficient heat to raise the temperature of fuel to its burning point or ignition temperature.
(c) Combustible or burnable material (Solid, Liquid or Gas).
Ques 2. What are the modes of spread of fire?
Ans - (a) Conduction. Transfer of heat by the intermediary material. Many materials which will not burn easily particularly
metals are good conductors for transmitting heat. These materials when heated by the fire may ignite other combustible material
with which these may be in contact.
(b) Convection. Transfer of heat through gases or smoke, Gases tend to rise until ceiling or roof is reached after which they
spread sideways in a mushroom manner and ignite combustible materials located at higher levels than the original fire e.g. fire
spreading onto top floor. The best method to check this is to remove or cool the combustible materials.
(c) Radiation. Radiation means transfer of heat from the source of fire, without heating the midway media e.g. air. The effect
of radiation can be countered by forming a water curtain between the fire and the object to be protected or the object may be removed
or cooled.
(d) Direct Burning. This phenomenon is self-explanatory. Direct burning is often due to a combination of the above two or three
factors viz, conduction, convection and radiation.
Ques 3. What are the various categories of fire fighting appliances?
Ans (a) Fire Extinguishers.
(b) Stirrup Pumps.
(c) Buckets/Ghee Tin (Water /sand containers)
(d) Fire Beaters and Hooks.
SECTION -4
Essential services and their Maintenance
Ques 1 -What are the essential services?
Ans (a) Postal, telegraph or telephone service.
(b) Railways, road, air and sea transport service for the carriage of passengers or goods.
(c) Running of ports of (b) above.
(d) Provision of water, electricity and sanitation.
(e) Medical services and essential supplies.
(f) Production and supply of essential commodities.
(g) Running of mint and security presses.
Ques 2. What is the role of NCC cadets for maintaining essential services?
Ans (a) Telephone exchange as operators.
(b) Hospitals- as nurses and as links between doctors, nurses, patients and hospital technicians. They could also help in
maintaining hospital discipline and security.
(c) First Aid Centres- establish and run these centres.
(d) Assist civil defence wardens in carrying out their duties.
(e) Carry out neighbourhood campaigns by motivating people to create self assistance groups.
(f) Counteract gossip and rumours to restore the morale of the people.
(g) Assist the civil authorities whenever feasible and to the best of ability. Some of the areas where cadets can help are:-
(i) Search for and rescue trapped people.
(ii) Salvage destroyed structures and property.
(iii) Distribution of relief material to the affected population for their temporary sustenance.
(iv) Coordinate the relief flow from out-side and ensure maximum coverage of territory
in provision of relief stores, food and water avoiding wastage and duplication of work in the same area.
(v) Repair and restore essential services to enable rescue and relief work and for normalization of activities.
SECTION - 5
Protection
Ques 1 -What are the protective measure against the air attack?
Ans (a) In the Trenches. The size of these trenches could be 8' to 10' long. 2' to 3 ' wide and 4' to 6' deep. Eight to ten
feet long units are dug in a zig-zag manner with an angle of 80 degrees to 100 degrees between each leg.
(b) In the Open. Lie on the ground with face downward resting on elbows with hands clasped behind the head so that chest is
not in contact with the ground. Put a rolled handkerchief in between teeth.
(c) In a Vehicle. Park the vehicle in a side lane leaving the ignition key in its place and take cover in the open.
(d) Inside the Building. Be near the inside wall of the building. Places below staircases, archways, doorways, corners and
under the cots are safer.
(e) In a Train. Turn off the lights and crawl under seats. On no account look outside the windows.
(f) In the Cinema. Remain seated on your seats.
(g) In a Bullock Cart or Tonga. Unyoke animals, tie them to the nearest tree or a pole, take shelter as in the open.
(h) Protection of Doors and Windows. Doors and windows can be screened by walls and sand bags.
Ques 2. What the various methods of rescue?
Ans (a) Methods Suitable for One Rescuer. Human Crutch, Pick-a-back (reverse), Fireman's lift. Rescue crawl, Removal
downstairs, Bowline drag and Toe drag.
(b) Methods Suitable for More than One Rescuer. Two handed seat, Three handed seat, Fourhanded seat, Fore and Aft
method, Two-man Human Crutch, Clothes lift, Blanket lift.
(c) Improvised Stretcher. Blankets, sheets or rugs salvaged from the site can be converted into improvised stretchers by using
small poles, broom handles etc.
SECTION - 6
Role of NCC during Natural Hazards
Ques 1 -What are the role of NCC cadets during natural disasters?
Ans (a) Traffic Management under supervision.
(b) Search and Rescue.
(c) First Aid and evacuation of rescued people.
(d) Helping in setting up and administration of Relief Camps.

(e) Collection, loading and dispatch of medical aid, material, food and other articles of relief.
(f) Conduct of cultural and recreational activities for victims to boost their morale at later / rehabilitation stages.
Ques 2 - What are the various points for consideration while employing NCC cadets for disaster management?
Ans (a) JD/JW cadets are young and may not be considered suitable for such operations. SW cadets may be used for softer
jobs like providing medical assistance or manning exchanges during strikes of nurses or telephone operators. Only SD cadets may be
found suitable for helping in natural calamities like earthquakes, land-slides and floods.
(b) Suitable bonds would be required to be obtained from parents of cadets.
(c) Cadets are never readily available to be mustered at short notice because they are busy with their studies at schools/colleges.
It is only during camps that the cadets are available and can be launched at short notice.
(d) Cadets are not adequately trained for specialized tasks related to Disaster Management. Suitable training must be given to
them during institutional training.
(e) Adequate allowances would require to be allocated for the cadets taking part in these activities.
(f) Joint schemes with the State Disaster Relief machinery would be required to be made in which NCC cadets may be
incorporated.
(g) Adequate signal equipment and other disaster relief equipment would be required to be authorised to NCC to carry out
necessary training.
(h) NCC cadets would have to carry out rehearsals along with the Army, Police, Fire Fighting forces
and others in the State.
SECTION - 7
Traffic Control in Disasters Management under Police Supervision
Ques 1 - What are the responsibilities of Traffic Police and where all cadets can be employed for disaster management?
Ans - (a) Immediate Action. On receipt of the information about any Disaster taking place, Dy SP concerned shall rush to the
spot immediately with his quick reaction team equipped with adequate communication equipment, rescue material, protective gear,
warning signs and contact numbers; assess the situation and inform the SSP about the situation SSP should arrange for additional
force from local resources. Some cadets can form part of the group which goes for the immediate action.
(b) Initial Law and Order. Local traffic police shall rush to the spot with ropes, search lights and other items for maintaining law
and order. Cadets can be incorporated with the local police personals.
(c) Cordoning. The entire affected area shall be cordoned off and no collection of crowd be allowed there.
Cadets can be used to cordon off effected areas.
(d) Casualty Management. The Traffic Police plays an important role in traffic control and guidance in the chain of
evacuation of casualties as injured persons shall be evacuated to the nearby hospital by the PCR vans, ambulances and other
modes of conveyance. Cadets can accompany the casualty or be employed as points man or liaison officer at hospitals..
(e) Traffic Flow. No traffic shall be allowed to pass through the affected areas and necessary diversion shall be made
accordingly. Diversion points can be manned by cadets in co-ordination with traffic police.
(f) Emergency Vehicle. The local traffic police shall ensure clear passage for emergency vehicles until traffic arrangements are
made. Cadets can be employed to check and ensure that only emergency vehicles are permitted to the right of way.
(g) Rescue Services. Help shall be provided to the rescue services and volunteers in all possible manner. This will
include guiding the fire tenders, ambulances etc to the place of incident through a clear route.
Cadets can be cooperated with rescue services and volunteers to guide and escorting duties.
(h) Adequate Reserve. Adequate force be kept at the scene of occurrence for traffic
control. Cadets can form part of the reserve forces to aid traffic police.
(j) Maint of Records of Incidents. The entire scene of incident must be video graphed as early as possible with a view
to reconstruct the scene of occurrence, during the course of
investigation. Cadets can be employed to videograph and carryout tasks in maintaining of records of incidents.
SECTION-8
DISASTER MANAGEMENT DURING FLOOD/CYCLONE
Ques -1 - What is the assistance required during flood/cyclone?
Ans (a) Flood/Cyclone Warning.
(b) Shelter Management.

(c) Evacuation & Rescue.
(d) First aid & Medical.
(e) Sanitation.
(f) Relief.
(g) Carcass Disposal.

(h) Patrolling and Liaison
Ques 2. What is the affective method to contact NCC cadets to be available for any assistance during calamities?
Ans (a) Radio / TV.

(b) Contact telephone numbers.
(c) Jeep with loudhailer.
(d) By word of mouth.

Ques 3 - Describe as to how the assistance will be provided during any flood/cyclone by NCC cadets?
Ans - All NCC cadets, both boys and girls, junior and senior along with motivated and responsible men, women and youth volunteers can
implement and supervise the activities of the contingency plan. Each group will have distinct activities to carry out before, during and after the
flood/cyclone. NCC cadets of each Gp will be trained in various aspects as under: -
(a) Relief Group. The member of the group collect and distribute relief such as food supply, cloth, kerosene, diesel,
utensils etc and coordinate all the relief requirement of the other action groups. Both the boy and girl cadets have to be capable of
interacting with the local authorities to ensure adequate supplies reach the affected areas in time.
(b) Warning Group. Members of this group could be cadets from JD. They have to be trained to understand radio warning and act
fast to spread the warning throughout the area of responsibility. Some members should have a radio before the flood/cyclone. This
group has to monitor weather forecast through wireless radio, TV, transportation and communication aids are needed to pass on
warning.
(c) Shelter Management Group. The members of this group can have maximum cadets from JW/SW. They will be at the
shelter and safe houses looking after the evacuees' food, water and medication requirements. This group can also coordinate with the
government authorities to ensure that health and nutrition facilities are available for the extra vulnerable groups, like women and
children.
(d) Evacuation and Rescue Groups. The members of this group have to be physically strong (both SD and SW), and should
be trained in basic evacuation and rescue method. The members of this group should coordinate with state government to get
facilities for rescue and evacuation in terms of rescue training. Rescue infrastructure and equipment.
(e) First Aid Medical Groups. There should be equal number of JD/SD and JW/SW cadets in this group. Those with some
knowledge of nursing will be preferable. The members will have to go through intensive training and drills for first aid medical
reasonability.
(f) Sanitation Groups. This group can consist of girl and boy cadets, who will look after the sanitation responsibilities both at the
shelter as well as outdoors.
(g) Carcass Disposal Groups. Rotting and undisputed carcasses create unhygienic conditions and have to be disposed off
immediately. Their disposal becomes an extremely important task. The members of this group have to be psychotically and physically
able to carry out this task and should have been medically protected. If possible the Civil Defence Volunteers, members from the
NSS/boys Scouts can be included in this group.
SECTION-9
DISASTER MANAGEMENT DURING EARTHQUAKE
Ques 1. What is likely to be the impact of earthquakes?
Ans - (a) Loss of Life.
(b) Injury.
(c) Damage to or destruction of property including crops.
(d) Disruption of production.
(e) Disruption of lifestyle.
(f) Loss of livelihood.
(g) Disruption to essential services.
(h) Damage to national infrastructure and disruption to administrative and organisational systems.
(j) Sociological and psychological after-effects.
Ques 2. What are the problem areas which need particular attention during relief operations?
Ans (a) Severe and extensive damage, creating the need for urgent counter
measures especially search and rescue and medical assistance.
(b) Difficulty of access and movement.
(c) Widespread loss of or damage to infrastructure, essential services and life support systems.
(d) Recovery requirements (restoration and rebuilding) may be life extensive and costly.
(e) Occurrence of earthquake in areas where such events are rather rare may cause problems due to lack of public awareness.
Ques 3. What are the important points to be kept in mind by residents of quake prone area?
Ans - (a) Keep in mind that most problems from a severe earthquake result from falling objects and debris (partial building
collapse, ceiling plaster, light fixtures etc) and not from ground movement.
(b) Shelves for bookcases etc should be fixed to the walls. Remove heavy objects from shelves above head level. Do not hang
plants in heavy pots that could swing free of hooks. Bookcases, cabinets or wall decorations can topple over and fall.
(c) Locate beds away from the windows and heavy objects that could fall. Do not hang mirrors or picture frames over beds.
(d) Secure appliances that could move causing rupture of gas or electrical lines. Know location of master switches and shut-of
valves.
(e) Make sure the overhead lighting fixtures are well secured to the ceiling and move heavy unstable objects away from exit
routes.
(f) Replace glass bottles with plastic containers or move them to the lowest shelves.
(g) Be aware that with a severe earthquake, all services such as electricity/water will probably be down. Emergency services may
be extremely limited for a few days.
(h) Emergency stores like water, long lasting ready to eat food, first aid kit medicines tools, portable radio, flash light, batteries,
blankets, warm jackets fire extinguisher and telephone/mobile etc be kept in a secure place at your residence or in your car.
SECTION-10
SETTING UP RELIEF CAMP DURING
DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Ques 1 - What are the basic considerations for setting up of relief camp for disaster management?
Ans. Following points are relevant for proper siting of relief camp: -
(a) Social Needs. In most circumstances the choice will be limited and any land meeting even minimum standards may be scarce.
However the site selected must meet the basic needs of the society.
(b) Water. The single most important site selection criteria are the availability of an adequate amount of water on a year-round basis.
The watershed of the area may be a consideration.
(c) Open Space. The site must provide a sufficient amount of usable space for the displaced population. Since there is always
the possibility that more people may arrive, the site should be large enough to allow for major expansion.
(d) Accessibility. The site must be accessible by vehicles and close to communication links, sources of supplies and services
such as food, cooking fuel, shelter material, and national community services.
(e) Environment. The area should be free of major environmental health hazards, potential diseases and harmful insects such
as mosquito and insects/ fly.
(f) Soil and Ground Cover. The soil should allow for water absorption and the retention of human waste. Rocky or
impermeable sites should be avoided.
(g) Land Rights. The land should be exempt from ownership rights or grazing and other uses by local population.
(h) Transit Centre. There may be a need to set up a reception or transit centre, through which displaced people pass on
the way to a long-term settlement site
SECTION-11
ASSISTANCE IN REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
Ques 1 - What should be the ideal priority for removal of debris?
Ans (a) Priority I. To remove debris that may damage entry and exit for emergency services, public health and safety.
(b) Priority II. To remove debris that poses a threat to life and safety, e.g. damage to public structures, bridges and road ways.
(c) Priority III. To remove debris that cause hindrance to the process of rehabilitation of disaster affected area.
(d) Priority IV. To remove debris on private property.
Ques 2 - What is the likely role of NCC cadets for removal of debris?
Ans - NCC Cadets could be employed as under : -
(a) Spread public awareness about task in hand to enhance participation.
(b) Remove debris in conjunction with civil services.
(c) For identification of disposal areas and as guides.
(d) Reporting/controlling of illegal dumping activity.
SECTION-12
COLLECTION AND DISTRIBUTION OF AID MATERIAL
Ques 1. What are the various types of Aid materials required during management of disasters?
Ans - Aid material can be divided into following categories: -
(a) Personal Clothing and bedding Items.
(b) Medical and Life Saving Equipment
(c) Housing and Shelters.
(d) Transportation.
(e) Debris Clearing Equipment.
(f) Animals and Live Stock.
(g) Disposal of the Dead.
(h) Communication.
(j) Food, Water and Cooking Facilities.
(k) Electricity and Lighting Facilities.
Ques 2. what is the source of supply of aid material?
Ans - (a) Central Government Organisations including Defence Services.
(b) State Government Organisations.
(c) Non Government Organisations (NGOs).
(d) Educational Institutions.
(e) Social Welfare Organisations.
(f) Resident Welfare Organisations.
(g) Red Cross.
(h) International Organisations like WHO etc.
(j) Individuals.
Ques 3 - What is the role of NCC cadets for collection of aid material?
Ans (a) Cadets can help at the time of collection and help in maintaining records.
(b) Help in the sifting of articles and bulk breaking and packaging.
(c) Help in dispatch of items by various means.
(d) NCC can establish their own collection and distribution centres as they are closely associated with schools and colleges all
over the country and even in the remotest areas of our country. These can be opened at unit/ group level.
(e) NCC is working and coordinating with government at the central and also at the state and district level and thus by their
disposition they are ideally suited for a parallel net work with other organisations.
Ques 4 - What is the role of NCC cadets for distribution of aid material?
Ans - (a) Can be co-opted with the PDS system.
(b) Work along with NGOs or other organisations.
(c) Work independently in the chain of NCC collection and distribution system.
(d) Work along with Defence Forces who are major contributors in crisis management.
(e) Operate and man various posts established for escorting and guiding delivery agents with adequate signal communications.
SECTION-13
MESSAGE SERVICES
Ques 1. What are various methods of communications?
Ans - (a) Messengers.
(b) Telephones including Cell phones.
(c) Two-way radio (VHF).
(d) Field Telephone.
(e) Signal transmission through propagation of waves as follows:-
(i) Ground Wave. Long and Medium waves range upto 30 Kms.
(ii) Space Wave. VHF and UHF waves range upto 50Kms.
(iii) Sky Wave. HF waves making use of ionosphere layer existing upto a height of 150-200
Kms from the surface of the earth. Range from 100 Kms to 1000 Kms.
(iv) Tropospheric Scatter. For forward propagation height range upto 8-10 Kms from the surface of the earth.
(f) Satellite.
(g) Dial-up modems (Internet including e-mail and Fax).
(h) Local Area Networks (LANs).
(j) Signals.
First Aid
SECTION-1
FIRST AID IN COMMON MEDICAL EMERGENCIES
Ques 1 - What is the first aid treatment for internal injuries?

Ans -
(a) Keep the patient warm, lying down with feet raised up and head kept low.
(b) Apply cold application on the suspected injured region.
(c) Cheer up the patient.
(d) Arrange medical attention as soon as possible
Ques 2 - What is the first aid treatment for burns and scalds?
Ans (a) Protect burnt area by applying bandage or cover exposed part with clean towel or cloth.
(b) Give complete rest and plenty of fluids to the patient.
(c ) Re-assure the patient.
(d) Give him morphia if available.
(a) Evacuate patient to the nearest hospital or dispensary.
Ques 3 - What is the first aid treatment for snake bite?
Ans (a) Make the victim lie down comfortably.
(b) Give convincing reassurance against fear of death.
(c ) Apply a light constricting tourniquet with handkerchief, bandage or shoe lace above the knee for a bite on the leg and
above the elbow for a bite on the arm. So that the poison does not flows to all part of the body.
(d) Wash with soap and water. Use water freely.
(e) Incise into the skin 2” x ½” across the fang mark with a blade.
(f) Suck the blood either with mouth or with a suction pump. Be careful that there is no cut or ulcer in
the mouth.
(g) Evacuate the patient quickly to the nearest dispensary or hospital.
(h) If breathing fails, start artificial respiration.
Ques 4 - What is the first aid treatment for scorpion bite?
Ans (a) If blood has been drawn, the wound should be cleaned well with antiseptic lotion.
(b) Evacuate casualty to the nearest dispensary or hospital.
Ques 5 - What is the first aid treatment for rabid dog bite?
Ans (a) Immediately wash with water and soap.
(b) Wound should be cleaned with available antiseptic.
(c) Patient should be sent to hospital for an anti- rabies injection course.
(d) Dog and the patient should be kept under observation for at least 10 days.
Ques 6 - What is the first aid treatment for foreign body in eye?
Ans a) Ask the patient not to rub the eyes.
(b) Wash the eye with water repeatedly for a minute or two.
(c ) Search for the foreign body by lifting the upper eyelid and parting the lower eyelid down. The patient should face the light. If the
foreign body is seen, it can be wiped off with the moistened corner of a handkerchief, cloth or cotton swab.
(d) If foreign body is fixed to the eye-ball, patient should be sent to the hospital with a light eye bandage.
Ques 7 - What is the first aid treatment for foreign body in nose?
Ans
(a) Blowing the nose and sneezing may expel the foreign body.
(b) Make the casualty breath through the mouth.
(c ) Do not try to remove the foreign body.
(d) Send the patient to the nearest hospital
Ques 8 - What is the first aid treatment for drowning?
Ans (a) Wet clothes should be loosened.
(b) Mouth, throat and nostrils should be cleaned of mucus and of any foreign body.
(c ) Patient should be made to lie down over his belly , face down , head turned to one side , arms stretched beyond the
head, tongue pulled out.
(d) Artificial respiration should be given till he starts breathing.
(e) Cover the patient with a blanket.
Ques 9 - What is the first aid treatment in case of electric shock?
Ans
(a) Switch off or break the current if possible.
(b) Remove the casualty from contact with the current, if possible. Stand on some insulating material such as rubber soled
shoes or boots or piles of newspapers.
(c ) Give artificial respiration.
(d) Treat for shock and burns.
SECTION -2
DRESSING OF WOUNDS
Ques 1 - What is the classification of wounds?
Ans - (a) Inside Wound
(b) Lacerated Wound.
(c) Punctured Wound.
(d) Gun Shot Wound.
(e) Shell Wound.
(f) Contusion.
Ques 2 – What is the first aid of wounds?
Ans - a) Place the patient in comfortable position.
(b) Stop the bleeding, if any.

(c) Remove any foreign body if it is easily visible and can be easily removed.
(d) Prevent the entry of germs by applying sterilized dressing like first field or shell dressing.
(e) Give rest to the part by sling.
(f) Immobilize the part, if wound is large or complicated by fracture.
(g) Treat the patient for shock.
(h) Send the patient to nearest hospital.
SECTTION-3
YOGA: INTRODUCTION AND EXERCISES

Ques 1 – What are the benefits of yoga?
Ans - (a) It removes stress, strain, tension and anger.
(b) Yoga harmonizes all disturbances in the body and eradicates ill effects completely.
(c) It brings efficiency and mental clarity.
(d) A person who develops his power of thoughts through Yoga has charming and dynamic
personality.
(e) Yoga helps in purifying the disrupted natural rhythm and harmony of the body, bestows grace, heals and makes one
free from all ill effects.
SECTION-4
PHYSICAL AND MENTAL HEALTH
Ques 1 – Define physical health?
Ans - Physical health is absence of disease and infirmity and it is assessed by taking health state measurements of the body.
Ques 2 – Define mental health?
Ans - Mental health refers to the successful performance of mental function, resulting in productive activities, fulfilling relationship with
other people, ability to adopt to change and cope up with adversities.
Ques 3 - What are the elements of Good Health?
Ans - (a) Absence of disease.
(b) Ability to work hard with efficiency and enthusiasm.
(c) Ability to endure stress and strain.
(d) Cheerfulness.
(e) Courage.
(f) Freedom from anxiety.
(g) Self control and self confidence.
(h) Sense of well being.
(j) Wholesome mental attitude.

Ques 4 - What are the characteristics of healthy mind?
Ans Characteristics of healthy mind are:-
(a) Normal appetite.
(b) Calmness.
(c) Cheerful outlook.
(d) Good temper.
(e) Socially acceptable habits.
(f) Well regulated instincts.
(g) Normal physical vitality.
(h) Receptivity to new ideas.
(j) Sex consciousness
Ques 5 - What measures will ensure mental health?
Ans .(a) Favourable home and school environment.
(b) Regular medical examination.
(c) Provision of educational and vocational guidance.
(d) Provision of co-curricular activities
SECTION-5
FRACTURES, TYPES AND TREATMENT
Ques 1 - Define fracture?
Ans - Fracture is a discontinuity or break in a bone, resulting in the dissolution of the supporting frame work of the body.
Ques 2 - What are the first aid measures for fractures?
Ans - The first aid measures are as under:-
(a) Reassure the patient and make him comfortable.
(b) Apply splints to immobilize the fracture with any common article like stick, rifle etc.
(c) Relieve him of discomfort and pain. Keep the patient warm.
(d) Do not meddle with the fracture.
Ques 3 - What is the first aid for dislocation?
Ans (a) Do not try to reduce the dislocation.
(b) Tie sling or bandage to immobilize the joint, apply cold compress to reduce the swelling.
(c) Send the patient to the nearest hospital for early treatment.
SECTION-6
EVACUATION OF CASUALTIES
Ques 1 - How to prioritize causalities for treatment?
Ans (a) Priority I – cases requiring resuscitation and urgent surgery.
(b) Priority II – cases requiring early surgery and possibly resuscitation.
(c) Priority III – All other casualties who require minor treatment.
Hygiene and Sanitation

HEALTH AND HYGIENE
SECTION-1
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF THE HUMAN BODY
Ques 1 – What are the main parts the Human body?
Ans - These ara as under : -
(a) Skelton
(b) Muscles.
(c) Blood Circulatory Organs.
(d) Respiratory Organs.
(e) Digestive Organs.
(f) Excretory Organs.
(g) Nervous System Organs
SECTION -2
HYGIENE AND SANITATION
Ques 1 – Define Hygiene?
Ans - Hygiene is the science which seeks to preserve and improve the health of the individual and of the community as a whole.
Ques - 2 – How to ensure proper personal hygiene?
Ans - It is as under : -
(a) 7-8 hours of Sleep
(b) Regular Bathing
(c) Eating and Drinking
(d) Care and Cleanliness of Skin, Hand, Hair and Teeth.
(e) Healthy food and proper rest.
(f) Exercise.
Ques 3 - What are the various methods of water purification?
(a) Boiling and distilling.

(b) Filtration.
(c) Sterilization.
(d) Pinking.
(e) Precipitation.
Ques 4 – Describe a soakage pit?
Ans - Essential for the disposal of liquid refuse like greasy water from kitchen and waste water from bathrooms. Dig a pit
4 feet by 4 feet and 5 feet to 6 feet deep. Fill with small stones and broken bricks. Cover the top with oiled sacking and put
earth or sand 6 inches above. In the centre keep a perforated empty tin of kerosene oil. Fill this tin with layers of gravel
or sand and gravel. In this, fit in a bucket, filled with straw, grass or some other grease retaining material. Remove the
strainer daily and replace with fresh one.
SECTION-3
PREVENTABLE DISEASES
Ques 1 – Describe classification of communicable diseases?
Ans - (a) Excremental Diseases
(b) Droplet Infection
(c) Contact Diseases
(d) Inset Borne Diseases
(e) Water borne diseases
(f) Animal Borne Diseases
Ques 2 – What are the preventive measures to ward off communicable diseases?
Ans - Preventive measures are as under : -
(a) Segregate the patient
(b) Destroy agents (germs) causing infection.
(c) Dis-infection.
(d) Control of the food and drink.
(e) Inoculation and Vaccination
SECTION-4
FIRST AID IN COMMON MEDICAL EMERGENCIES
Ques 1 - What is the first aid treatment for internal injuries?
Ans -
(a) Keep the patient warm, lying down with feet raised up and head kept low.
(b) Apply cold application on the suspected injured region.
(c) Cheer up the patient.
(d) Arrange medical attention as soon as possible
Ques 2 - What is the first aid treatment for burns and scalds?
Ans (a) Protect burnt area by applying bandage or cover exposed part with clean towel or cloth.
(b) Give complete rest and plenty of fluids to the patient.
(c ) Re-assure the patient.
(d) Give him morphia if available.

(f) Evacuate patient to the nearest hospital or dispensary.
Ques 3 - What is the first aid treatment for snake bite?
Ans (a) Make the victim lie down comfortably.
(b) Give convincing reassurance against fear of death.
(c ) Apply a light constricting tourniquet with handkerchief, bandage or shoe lace above the knee for a bite on the leg and
above the elbow for a bite on the arm. So that the poison does not flows to all part of the body.
(d) Wash with soap and water. Use water freely.
(e) Incise into the skin 2” x ½” across the fang mark with a blade.
(f) Suck the blood either with mouth or with a suction pump. Be careful that there is no cut or ulcer in the mouth.
(g) Evacuate the patient quickly to the nearest dispensary or hospital.
(h) If breathing fails, start artificial respiration.
Ques 4 - What is the first aid treatment for scorpion bite?
Ans (a) If blood has been drawn, the wound should be cleaned well with antiseptic lotion.
(b) Evacuate casualty to the nearest dispensary or hospital.
Ques 5 - What is the first aid treatment for rabid dog bite?
Ans (a) Immediately wash with water and soap.
(b) Wound should be cleaned with available antiseptic.
(c) Patient should be sent to hospital for an anti- rabies injection course.
(d) Dog and the patient should be kept under observation for at least 10 days.
Ques 6 - What is the first aid treatment for foreign body in eye?
Ans a) Ask the patient not to rub the eyes.
(b) Wash the eye with water repeatedly for a minute or two.
(c ) Search for the foreign body by lifting the upper eyelid and parting the lower eyelid down. The
patient should face the light. If the foreign body is seen, it can be wiped off with the moistened corner of a
handkerchief, cloth or cotton swab.
(d) If foreign body is fixed to the eye-ball, patient should be sent to the hospital with a light eye bandage.
Ques 7 - What is the first aid treatment for foreign body in nose?
Ans
(a) Blowing the nose and sneezing may expel the foreign body.
(b) Make the casualty breath through the mouth.
(c ) Do not try to remove the foreign body.
(d) Send the patient to the nearest hospital
Ques 8 - What is the first aid treatment for drowning?
Ans (a) Wet clothes should be loosened.
(b) Mouth, throat and nostrils should be cleaned of mucus and of any foreign body.
(c ) Patient should be made to lie down over his belly , face down , head turned to one side , arms stretched beyond the
head, tongue pulled out.
(d) Artificial respiration should be given till he starts breathing.
(e) Cover the patient with a blanket.

Ques 9 - What is the first aid treatment in case of electric shock?
Ans
(a) Switch off or break the current if possible.
(b) Remove the casualty from contact with the current, if possible. Stand on some insulating material such as rubber soled
shoes or boots or piles of newspapers.
(c ) Give artificial respiration.
(d) Treat for shock and burns.
SECTION -5
DRESSING OF WOUNDS
Ques 1 - What is the classification of wounds?
Ans - (a) Inside Wound
(b) Lacerated Wound.
(c) Punctured Wound.
(d) Gun Shot Wound.
(e) Shell Wound.
(f) Contusion.
Ques 2 – What is the first aid of wounds?
Ans - a) Place the patient in comfortable position.
(b) Stop the bleeding, if any.
(c) Remove any foreign body if it is easily visible and can be easily removed.
(d) Prevent the entry of germs by applying sterilized dressing like first field or shell dressing.
(e) Give rest to the part by sling.
(f) Immobilize the part, if wound is large or complicated by fracture.
(g) Treat the patient for shock.
(h) Send the patient to nearest hospital.
SECTTION-6
YOGA: INTRODUCTION AND EXERCISES
Ques 1 – What are the benefits of yoga?
Ans - (a) It removes stress, strain, tension and anger.
(b) Yoga harmonizes all disturbances in the body and eradicates ill effects completely
(c) It brings efficiency and mental clarity.
(d) A person who develops his power of thoughts through Yoga has charming and dynamic personality.
(e) Yoga helps in purifying the disrupted natural rhythm and harmony of the body, bestows grace, heals and makes one
free from all ill effects.
SECTION-7
PHYSICAL AND MENTAL HEALTH
Ques 1 – Define physical health?

Ans - Physical health is absence of disease and infirmity and it is assessed by taking health state measurements of the body.
Ques 2 – Define mental health?
Ans - Mental health refers to the successful performance of mental function, resulting in productive activities, fulfilling relationship with
other people, ability to adopt to change and cope up with adversities.
Ques 3 - What are the elements of Good Health?
Ans - (a) Absence of disease.
(b) Ability to work hard with efficiency and enthusiasm.
(c) Ability to endure stress and strain.
(d) Cheerfulness.
(e) Courage.
(f) Freedom from anxiety.
(g) Self control and self confidence.
(h) Sense of well being.
(j) Wholesome mental attitude.
Ques 4 - What are the characteristics of healthy mind?
Ans Characteristics of healthy mind are:-
(a) Normal appetite.
(b) Calmness.
(c) Cheerful outlook.
(d) Good temper.
(e) Socially acceptable habits.
(f) Well regulated instincts.
(g) Normal physical vitality.
(h) Receptivity to new ideas.
(j) Sex consciousness
Ques 5 - What measures will ensure mental health?
Ans .(a) Favourable home and school environment.
(b) Regular medical examination.
(c) Provision of educational and vocational guidance.
(d) Provision of co-curricular activities
SECTION-8
FRACTURES, TYPES AND TREATMENT
Ques 1 - Define fracture?
Ans - Fracture is a discontinuity or break in a bone, resulting in the dissolution of the supporting frame work of the body.
Ques 2 - What are the first aid measures for fractures?
Ans - The first aid measures are as under:-
(a) Reassure the patient and make him comfortable.

(b) Apply splints to immobilize the fracture with any common article like stick, rifle etc.
(c) Relieve him of discomfort and pain. Keep the patient warm.
(d) Do not meddle with the fracture.
Ques 3 - What is the first aid for dislocation?
Ans (a) Do not try to reduce the dislocation.
(b) Tie sling or bandage to immobilize the joint, apply cold compress to reduce the swelling.
(c) Send the patient to the nearest hospital for early treatment.
SECTION-9
EVACUATION OF CASUALTIES
Ques 1 - How to prioritize causalities for treatment?
Ans (a) Priority I – cases requiring resuscitation and urgent surgery.
(b) Priority II – cases requiring early surgery and possibly resuscitation.
(c) Priority III – All other casualties who require minor treatment.
Adventure Activities
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
Q 1 : What do you understand by adventure training?
Ans: The training given to the cadets/ youth by the NCC to develop the quality of leadership, self-confidence, determination and
feelings of team spirit.
Q 2: Why NCC conducts the adventure activities?
Ans: To inculcate the quality of leadership & determination in the cadets.
Ques 3 – What are the various land base adventure activities?
Ans - (a) Mountaineering.
(b) Mountaineering Expeditions.
(c) All India Treks.
(d) Cycle and Motor Cycle Expedition.
Ques 4 – What are the various Naval activities?
Ans - (a) Sailing expedition.
(b) Scuba Diving.
(c) Boat pulling.
(d) Wind surfing.
(e) Kayaking.
Ques 5 – What are the various air based activities?
Ans - (a) Para Sailing
(b) Slithering
(c) Para jumps
Ques 6. What are the aims of adventure activities?
Ans - (a) To develop and enhances the spirit of adventure which is inherent in all human beings.
(b) Inculcate self reliance, confidence, discipline and leadership qualities.
(c) Promote Co-operation and team spirit.
(d) Spread the achievements of NCC and it's importance to remote areas.
SECTION 2
TREKKING
Ques 1 – What are the aims of trekking?
Ans - (a) Inculcate a spirit of adventure, exploration, inquisitiveness and practical investigation.
(b) Develop stamina, endurance, self confidence, team spirit and esprit-de-corps.
(c) Develop love for nature and concern for environmental cleanliness.
(d) Promote National Integration.
SECTION 3
CYCLE EXPEDITION: PLANNING, ORGANISATION & CONDUCT
(JD/JW Cadets Only)
Ques 1 – What are the types of cycle expeditions?
Ans (a) To places outside the state.
(b) Places of historical and religious importance.
(c) Places of natural beauty.

(d) Distant countryside I remote places
(d) To visit certain historical places.
Ques 2 - What all points should be borne in mind while planning a cycle expedition?
Ans (a) Realistic -and not over ambitious.
(b) Physical standards of cadets.

(c) Financial constraints.
(d) Number of cadets.
(e) Selection of route and halts.

(f) Logistic plan.
(g) Selection of cadets.
(h) Collection of information.
(j) Liaison with civilian I military authorities.
SECTION 4
PARASAILING EQUIPMENT & CONDUCT

Ques 1 – What is the basic equipment required for papa sailing?
Ans (a) Para sail canopy.
(b) Harness.
(c) Two ropes.
(d) Two Yoke.
(e) Release Mechanism.
(1) The prime Mover (jeep or motor launch).
Ques 2 – What all crew are required for para sailing?
Ans - (a) Controller
(a) Tow Crew
(b) Launch crew
(c) End Helper
Ques 3 – What all precautions must be taken during para sailing?
Ans - (a) All the equipment brought for use is in serviceable condition.
(b) The course/track is smooth for the vehicle run and no obstacle exist on it Le. Trees, poles, electric
lines, telephone lines etc.
(c) A dummy practice launch should always be carried out.
(d) No launch is to be made when winds are turbulent or dusty.
(e) All the members responsible for conducting para sailing are conversant of their duties.
(f) Take off should always be made directly into the wind.
(g) The canopy will be thoroughly checked for any damage.
(h) At take off, if the para sailor trips or falls, the vehicle will be stopped immediately
(j) In case para sailor rotates or swings more than 45 degrees, the vehicle will be slowed and landing procedure will be carried
out.
(k) The damaged para sail I canopy should not be used.
(I) Helmet must be used by the para sailor.

Social Service
SECTION-1
WEAKER SECTIONS OF OUR SOCIETY AND THEIR NEEDS
Ques 1 – What are the various weaker sections of Indian society?
Ans (a) Scheduled Caste (SC)
(b) Scheduled Tribes (ST).
(c) Other Backward Classes (OBC).

Ques 2 - What are various arguments in favour of Reservation Policy?
Ans - (a) Social diversity is desirable in campuses and work places. It can bring out hidden talent
of society.
(b) One way to do it is to provide relaxed entry criteria for under privileged groups.
(c) Hardship faced by those in general category is due to shortage of seats in professional
colleges and shortage of employment opportunities and not due to reservation.
Ques 3 What are various points against reservation policy?
Ans - (a) Economic conditions should be the basis for reservation.
(b) Reservation decisions are taken keeping political interests in mind.
(c) Allocation of quotas on the basis of caste is a form of racial discrimination and thus
contrary to right to equality.
(d) Merit is severely compromised by reserving seats for certain caste-based communities.
(e) Caste system is being kept alive by reservation policy.
Ques 4 – Write down contribution of NCC cadets to help the weaker section of our society?
Ans - (a) Help colleagues from weaker section of society in studies and to acquire vocational skills.
(b) Do not discriminate on the basis of social status of any one.
(c) Learn the values of equality and social justice.
SECTION-2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND ITS NEED
Ques 1 – What are the various types of social services?
Ans - (a) Education.
(b) Family welfare, Medical care, Family planning and Nutrition.
(c) Provision of Water and Cooking fuel, Roads, Electricity and Sanitation.
(d) Old age support systems.
(e) Employment.
(f) Social assistance, Social security, Care & protection.
(g) Housing and Rehabilitation.
(h) Recreation, Sports and Social activities.
SECTION-3
FAMILY PLANNING
Ques 1 - Define family planning?
Ans - Family planning is defined as the voluntary, responsible decision made by individual and couples as to
the desired family size and timing of birth.
Ques 2 – What are the various methods of family planning?
Ans - (a) Vasectomy.
(b) Tubectomy.
(c) Conventional contraceptives like condoms and diaphragms.
(d) Oral pills.

Ques 3 – What are the suggested measures to ensure sucess of family planning policy of the Govt?
(a) Voluntary encouragement of family planning for healthy children
(b) Stringent laws and massive campaign through the electronic and print media to create conducive
environment.
(c) Take steps encouraging a two-child norm.
(d) Educating women particularly in backward areas.
(e) Early marriage be strictly checked and efforts be made to raise the living standard and improve
literacy rate.
(f) Couples adopting family planning should be given all possible assistance.
(g) Provide basic health care facilities in the backward areas.
(h) Involvement of religious leaders in the programme.
(j) Development of rural areas.
SECTION-4
HIV/AIDS: CAUSES & PREVENTION
AND
CONTRIBUTION OF YOUTH TOWARDS PREVENTION OF AIDS
Ques 1 - Define HIV?
Ans - HIV (Human Immuno-deficiency Virus) is a virus that gradually destroys the body‟s immune system.
Que 2 - Define AIDS?
Ans - AIDS (Acquired Immuno Deficiency Syndrome) is a condition wherein various diseases affect the body
because of the body‟s weak natural defence mechanism – the immunity.
Note - AIDS is an acquired condition in which a person may have various diseases that cause similar symptoms, all of
which are due to the body’s diminished ability to fight diseases. Anyone who has HIV infection will develop AIDS over a
period of time.
Ques 3. – How does HIV/AIDS spreads
Ans - (a) Sexual transmission
(b) Blood transfusion.
(c) Sharing needles and syringes for intravenous drug use.
(d) Mother-to-child transmission during pregnancy, delivery or breastfeeding
Ques 4 - Is there any risk of HIV/AIDS infection due to blood donation?
Ans - Blood donation has no risk of getting HIV infection because the needles and other equipment used for
collecting blood are safe.
Ques 5 – What are various methods to prevent HIV/AIDS?
Ans - There are four main methods which are as under : -
(a) Being in a mutually faithful sexual relationship
(b) Checking all the blood and blood products for HIV infection before transfusion.
(c) Avoiding drug abuse, especially sharing needles and syringes for injecting drugs.
(d) Reducing the risk of mother-to-child transmission by following recommended guidelines for
preventing parent to child transmission of HIV infection.
Ques 6 . What is the role of youth in preventing HIV infection?
Ans - (a) Preventing HIV infection/re-infection at individual/community level.
(b) Spread awareness and educate the under privileged section of society.
(c) Promote responsible behaviours, especially those related to sexual behaviours and drug abuse.
(d) Imbibe values and play active role to address gender imbalance.
(e) Educate general public that the HIV can not be transmitted by the following modes:-
(a) Shaking Hands.
(b) Sharing of Clothes.
(c) Sharing of Food and Utensils.
(d) Sharing of Toilets.
(e) Insect Bites.
(f) Hugging or Kissing.
(g) Working in the same office or travelling in the same vehicle.
(h) Playing or swimming with the infected person.
(j) Coughing, sneezing or in routine patient-care activities (bed- making, feeding etc).
SECTION-5
CANCER, ITS CAUSES AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Ques 1 - What are the causes of cancer?
Ans - Main causes of cancer are:-
(a) Prolonged chewing of tobacco, zarda, pan and pan masala.
(b) Heavy smoking.

(c) Excessive drinking.
(d) Poor oral hygiene and inadequate dental care.
(e) Air and water pollution.
(f) Deficiency of balanced diet.
Ques 2 – What are the early signs of cancer amongst Gutka and tobacco users?
Ans - (a) Any sore and ulcer on tongue, cheek or gums that does not heal within a fortnight.
(a) Red and white patches on the lips or mouth.
(b) A lump of swelling anywhere in the mouth or neck.
(c) Difficulty in walking.
(d) Difficulty in speech.
(e) Repeated bleeding in the mouth.
(f) Numbness in the mouth.
Ques 3 – What are the preventive measure against cancer?
Ans -
(a) Avoiding smoking.
(b) Avoiding tobacco in any form.
(c) Good oral hygiene.

(d) Avoiding diet high in processed and preserved meat, smoked and salted food.
(e) Avoiding obesity.
(f) Handling asbestos and certain dyes with precaution.
(g) Early treatment on detection.
SECTION-6
CONTRIBUTION OF YOUTH TOWARDS SOCIAL WELFARE
Ques 1 – What is the contribution of youth towards social welfare?
Ans - Contribution of youth is as under : -
(a) Leadership.
(b) Community Service.
(c ) National and Cultural Integration.
(d) Education and Literacy. .
(e) Environment.
(f) Health Care and Family Welfare.
(g) Physical Education and Adventure Training.
(h) Old Age Care.
(j) Watershed and Waste Land Development.
SECTION-7
NON- GOVERNMENT ORGANISATION AND
THEIR CONTRIBUTION TO THE SOCIETY
Ques 1 - Define NGO?
Ans - An NGO is a non-profit group or association that acts outside of institutionalised political structures and
pursue matters of interest to its members by lobbying, persuasion, or direct action. Their goals are primarily non-
commercial. They collect funds both from people and the government.
Ques 2 - What are the various types of NGOs?
Ans - (a) INGO. International NGOs.
(b) BINGO. Business oriented International NGO.
(c) RINGO. Religious International NGOs.
(d) ENGO. Environment NGO.
Ques 2 - What are the various activities under taken by NGOs?
Ans - (a) Blood Donation.
(b) Adult Literacy.
(c) Anti Dowry Drive.
(d) Anti Leprosy Drive.
(e) Anti Drug Drive.
(f) Tree Plantation.

(g) Environmental Programmes.
(h) Help in natural calamities such as Flood, Earth-quake.
(j) Educating people about AIDS.
(k) Family Planning Programmes.
(l) Community Development Work.
(m) Promotion of Social-equality.
(n) Wildlife and Animal Care.
(o) Human-rights.
(p) Awareness Campaign.
(q) Child Care.
(r) Polio Eradication drive.
(s) Providing schooling facilities especially in remote villages and rural areas.
(t) Creating and providing health and hygiene infrastructure and facilities.
(u) Cottage Industry.
(v) Orphanage and Old Age Homes.
SECTION-8
DRUG TRAFFICKING AND CRIME
Ques 1 – Define Drug?
Ans - A `DRUG` is a substance–solid, liquid or gas that brings about physical and / or psychological changes.
Drugs affect the central nervous system.
Ques 2 – What are the various types of drugs and name the common drugs in each category?
Ans (a) Depressants. Depressants are drugs that slow down the function of the central nervous
system. Depressant drugs do not necessarily make a person feel depressed. They include:-
(i) Alcohol.
(ii) Cannabis.
iii) Barbiturates, including Seconal, Tuinal and Amytal.
(iv) Benzodiazepines (Tranquilisers), Benzos, Tranx, such as Rohypnol, Valium, Serepax,

Mogadon, Normison and Eupynos.
(v) GHB (Gamma- hydroxybutrate), or Fantasy
(vi) Opiates and Opioids, including Heroin.
(b) Stimulants. Stimulants act on the central nervous system to speed up the messages to and from
the brain. They make the user feel more awake, alert or confident. Stimulants increase heart rate, body
temperature and blood pressure. Other effects include appetite, dilated pupils, talkativeness, agitation and
sleep disturbance. Mild stimulants include:-
(i) Ephedrine used in medicines for bronchitis, high fever and asthma.
(ii) Caffeine in coffee, tea and cola drinks.
(iii) Nicotine in tobacco.
(c) Hallucinogens. Hallucinogens affect perception, People who have taken them may believe they
see, hear and perceive things that are not really there or what they see may be distorted in some way.
The effects of hallucinogens vary a great deal, so it is impossible to predict how they will affect a particular
person at a particular time. Hallucinogens include:-
(i) Dhatura
(ii) Ketamine
Ques 3 – What is the role of “Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances (NDPS) Act and Rules”?
Ans - (a) Punishment of upto 20 yrs rigorous imprisonment and fine up to Rupees Two Lakhs for
indulging in trafficking of narcotic drugs and psychotropic substances.
(b) Death sentence in case of repeat of this offence.
(c) Forfeiture of property of smugglers.
(d) Regulating of legitimate trade and commerce of NDPS for medicinal and scientific
purposes. The “Prevention of Illicit Trafficking in Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances”(
PITNDPS) provides for detention of persons indulging in trafficking of narcotic drugs for 1 to 2 years by an
executive order
Aid to Civil Authorities

CIVIL AFFAIRS AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT
SECTION -1
Civil Defence organisation and its Duties
Ques 1 -Define civil defence?
Ans - It is a measure adopted by the civilian population, Government, local self bodies and voluntary
organisation etc, during the war to minimize the effects of enemy action on men and material. It is the defence of
the citizens by the citizens.
Ques – 2. What is the organisation of civil defence at District level?
Ans - District Magistrate is controller along with in charge for various civil defence services like Civil Surgeon,
Superintendent of Police, PWD Engineer, Publicity officer etc.
Ques 3 - Write various kinds of civil defence services?
Ans - (a) Headquarters Service
(b) Warden‟s Service
(c) Fire Fighting Service
(d) Casualty Services
(e) Communication Services
(f) Training Services
(g) Rescue Services
(h) Welfare Services
(j) Depot and Transport Services
(k) Salvage Service.
(l) Corpse Disposal Service
(m) Supply Service
SECTION -2
Types of emergencies and natural disasters
Ques 1 -Define disaster?
Ans - Disaster denotes any odd event natural or man made which brings about immense misery to a region and
it becomes difficult to cope up with the situation through local resources. There are two types of disasters i.e.
Natural and Man made.
Ques 2 - What are the natural disasters?
Ans
(a) Wind Related - Storm, Cyclone, Tornado, Storm surge and Tidal waves.
(b) Water Related - Flood, Cloudburst, Flash flood, Excessive rains and Drought.
(c) Earth Related - Earthquake, Tsunamis, Avalanches, Landslides and Volcanic eruptions.
Ques 3 – What are the man made disaters?
Ans (a) Accidents. Road, Rail, Air, Sea and Building collapse.
(b) Industrial Mishaps. Gas Leak, explosion, sabotage and safety breach.
(c) Fire. Building, Coal and Oil.
(d) Forest Fire. In tropical countries forest fires are often manmade.
(e) Contamination/Poisoning. Food, water, illicit-liquor and epidemics.
(f) Terrorists Activities.
(g) Ecological. Pollution (air, water, noise), soil degradation, loss of biodiversity, global warming, sea
level rise, toxic wastes and nuclear accidents.
(h) Warfare. Conventional, chemical and nuclear.
Ques 4 - Describe Earth quack, Tsunami, Draught and Flood.
Ans (a) Earthquake. Layers of rock make up the earth‟s surface. Rocks do not bend or break
easily. Tension caused by movement of Earth‟s plates, build up over the years until the rocks can take the
strain no longer. Suddenly they crack and shift, sending out shock waves, and reducing anything built on
the surface to rubble. This is what we call an earthquake. The shock of the initial earthquake may
be followed by a series of aftershocks over the next few days. These fade as the rocks settle
down into their new positions.
(b) Tsunamis. This giant wave is caused by an undersea earthquake. Vibrations rush
through the ocean at hundreds of kilometers an hour. When they reach shallow waters they slow
down and build up into vast waves, at times 76m (250 ft) tall. The tsunami crashes onto the shore,
sweeping away anything in its way.
(c) Drought. If, over about two weeks, there is less than 0.2 mm (1/100in) of precipitation, there
is said to be a drought. Without reservoirs, there is not enough water for people and crops. Some
places have extreme drought which lasts for many years. Droughts have disastrous and long term
impact on the economy and can affect a large segment of the society which may last for months and in
some cases several years. Generally, drought situation may be defined as a temporary reduction in water
or moisture availability significantly below the normal or expected amount for a specific period. Drought is
a slow onset phenomenon.
(d) Flood. It can arise from abnormally heavy precipitation, dam failures, rapid snow melting, river
blockages or even burst water mains. It is usually sudden in onset. Types of floods can further be
classified into Inland and Coastal floods. Major floods result in physical damage, deaths and injuries,
problems in drinking water supply and food shortages and displacement of population.
SECTION -3
Fire Fighting
Ques 1 -What are the three elements for fire?
Ans - (a) Oxygen.
(b) Sufficient heat to raise the temperature of fuel to its burning point or ignition temperature.
(c) Combustible or burnable material (Solid, Liquid or Gas).
Ques 2 – What are the modes of spread of fire?
Ans - (a) Conduction. Transfer of heat by the intermediary material. Many materials which will not
burn easily particularly metals are good conductors for transmitting heat. These materials when heated
by the fire may ignite other combustible material with which these may be in contact.
(b) Convection. Transfer of heat through gases or smoke, Gases tend to rise until ceiling or roof is
reached after which they spread sideways in a mushroom manner and ignite combustible materials
located at higher levels than the original fire e.g. fire spreading onto top floor. The best method to check
this is to remove or cool the combustible materials.
(c) Radiation. Radiation means transfer of heat from the source of fire, without heating the midway
media e.g. air. The effect of radiation can be countered by forming a „water curtain‟ between the fire and
the object to be protected or the object may be removed or cooled.
(d) Direct Burning. This phenomenon is self-explanatory. Direct burning is often due to a
combination of the above two or three factors viz, conduction, convection and radiation.
Ques 3. – What are the various categories of fire fighting appliances?
Ans (a) Fire Extinguishers.
(b) Stirrup Pumps.
(c) Buckets/Ghee Tin (Water /sand containers)
(d) Fire Beaters and Hooks.
SECTION -4
Essential services and their Maintenance
Ques 1 -What are the essential services?
Ans (a) Postal, telegraph or telephone service.
(b) Railways, road, air and sea transport service for the carriage of passengers or goods.
(c) Running of ports of (b) above.
(d) Provision of water, electricity and sanitation.
(e) Medical services and essential supplies.
(f) Production and supply of essential commodities.
(g) Running of mint and security presses.
Ques 2 – What is the role of NCC cadets for maintaining essential services?
Ans (a) Telephone exchange – as operators.
(b) Hospitals- as nurses and as links between doctors, nurses, patients and hospital
technicians. They could also help in maintaining hospital discipline and security.
(c) First Aid Centres- establish and run these centres
(d) Assist civil defence wardens in carrying out their duties.
(e) Carry out neighbourhood campaigns by motivating people to create self assistance groups.
(f) Counteract gossip and rumours to restore the morale of the people.
(g) Assist the civil authorities whenever feasible and to the best of ability. Some of the areas
where cadets can help are:-
(i) Search for and rescue trapped people.
(ii) Salvage destroyed structures and property.
(iii) Distribution of relief material to the affected population for their temporary sustenance.
(iv) Coordinate the relief flow from out-side and ensure maximum coverage of territory in
provision of relief stores, food and water avoiding wastage and duplication of work in the same
area.
(v) Repair and restore essential services to enable rescue and relief work and for
normalization of activities.
SECTION - 5
Protection
Ques 1 -What are the protective measure against the air attack?
Ans (a) In the Trenches. The size of these trenches could be 8‟ to 10‟ long. 2‟ to 2 ½‟ wide and
4‟ to 6‟ deep. Eight to ten feet long units are dug in a zig-zag manner with an angle of 80 degrees to 100
degrees between each leg.
(b) In the Open. Lie on the ground with face downward resting on elbows with hands clasped
behind the head so that chest is not in contact with the ground. Put a rolled handkerchief in between
teeth.
(c) In a Vehicle. Park the vehicle in a side lane leaving the ignition key in its place and take cover in
the open.
(d) Inside the Building. Be near the inside wall of the building. Places below staircases, archways,
doorways, corners and under the cots are safer.
(e) In a Train. Turn off the lights and crawl under seats. On no account look outside the windows.
(f) In the Cinema. Remain seated on your seats.
(g) In a Bullock Cart or Tonga. Unyoke animals, tie them to the nearest tree or a pole, take shelter
as in the open.
(h) Protection of Doors and Windows. Doors and windows can be screened by walls and sand
bags.
Ques 2 – What the various methods of rescue?
Ans (a) Methods Suitable for One Rescuer. Human Crutch, Pick-a-back (reverse), Fireman‟s
lift. Rescue crawl, Removal downstairs, Bowline drag and Toe drag.
(b) Methods Suitable for More than One Rescuer. Two handed seat, Three handed seat,
Fourhanded seat, Fore and Aft method, Two-man Human Crutch, Clothes lift, Blanket lift.
(c) Improvised Stretcher. Blankets, sheets or rugs salvaged from the site can be converted into
improvised stretchers by using small poles, broom handles etc.
SECTION - 6
Role of NCC during Natural Hazards
Ques 1 -What are the role of NCC cadets during natural disasters?
Ans (a) Traffic Management under supervision.
(b) Search and Rescue.
(c) First Aid and evacuation of rescued people.
(d) Helping in setting up and administration of Relief Camps.
(e) Collection, loading and dispatch of medical aid, material, food and other articles of relief.
(f) Conduct of cultural and recreational activities for victims to boost their morale at later /
rehabilitation stages.
Ques 2 - What are the various points for consideration while employing NCC cadets for disaster
management?
Ans (a) JD/JW cadets are young and may not be considered suitable for such operations. SW
cadets may be used for softer jobs like providing medical assistance or manning exchanges during strikes
of nurses or telephone operators. Only SD cadets may be found suitable for helping in natural calamities
like earthquakes, land-slides and floods.
(b) Suitable bonds would be required to be obtained from parents of cadets.
(c) Cadets are never readily available to be mustered at short notice because they are busy with their
studies at schools/colleges. It is only during camps that the cadets are available and can be launched at
short notice.
(d) Cadets are not adequately trained for specialized tasks related to Disaster Management. Suitable
training must be given to them during institutional training.
(e) Adequate allowances would require to be allocated for the cadets taking part in these activities.
(f) Joint schemes with the State Disaster Relief machinery would be required to be made in which
NCC cadets may be incorporated.
(g) Adequate signal equipment and other disaster relief equipment would be required to be
authorised to NCC to carry out necessary training.
(h) NCC cadets would have to carry out rehearsals along with the Army, Police, Fire Fighting forces and others in the State.
SECTION - 7
Traffic Control in Disasters Management under Police Supervision
Ques 1 - What are the responsibilities of Traffic Police and where all cadets can be employed for disaster
management?
Ans - (a) Immediate Action. On receipt of the information about any Disaster taking place, Dy SP
concerned shall rush to the spot immediately with his quick reaction team equipped with adequate
communication equipment, rescue material, protective gear, warning signs and contact numbers; assess
the situation and inform the SSP about the situation SSP should arrange for additional force from local
resources. Some cadets can form part of the group which goes for the immediate action.
(b) Initial Law and Order. Local traffic police shall rush to the spot with ropes, search lights and
other items for maintaining law and order. Cadets can be incorporated with the local police
personals.
(c) Cordoning. The entire affected area shall be cordoned off and no collection of crowd be allowed
there. Cadets can be used to cordon off effected areas.
(d) Casualty Management. The Traffic Police plays an important role in traffic control and
guidance in the chain of evacuation of casualties as injured persons shall be evacuated to the nearby
hospital by the PCR vans, ambulances and other modes of conveyance. Cadets can accompany the
casualty or be employed as points man or liaison officer at hospitals..
(e) Traffic Flow. No traffic shall be allowed to pass through the affected areas and necessary
diversion shall be made accordingly. Diversion points can be manned by cadets in co-ordination with
traffic police.
(f) Emergency Vehicle. The local traffic police shall ensure clear passage for emergency vehicles
until traffic arrangements are made. Cadets can be employed to check and ensure that only
emergency vehicles are permitted to the right of way.
(g) Rescue Services. Help shall be provided to the rescue services and volunteers in all
possible manner. This will include guiding the fire tenders, ambulances etc to the place of incident through
a clear route. Cadets can be cooperated with rescue services and volunteers to guide and
escorting duties.
(h) Adequate Reserve. Adequate force be kept at the scene of occurrence for traffic control.
Cadets can form part of the reserve forces to aid traffic police.
(j) Maint of Records of Incidents. The entire scene of incident must be video graphed as
early as possible with a view to reconstruct the scene of occurrence, during the course of investigation.
Cadets can be employed to videograph and carryout tasks in maintaining of records of
incidents.
SECTION-8
DISASTER MANAGEMENT DURING FLOOD/CYCLONE
Ques -1 - What is the assistance required during flood/cyclone?
Ans (a) Flood/Cyclone Warning.
(b) Shelter Management.
(c) Evacuation & Rescue.
(d) First aid & Medical.
(e) Sanitation.
(f) Relief.
(g) Carcass Disposal.
(h) Patrolling and Liaison
Ques 2 – What is the affective method to contact NCC cadets to be available for any assistance during
calamities?
Ans (a) Radio / TV.
(b) Contact telephone numbers.
(c) Jeep with loudhailer.
(d) By word of mouth.
Ques 3 - Describe as to how the assistance will be provided during any flood/cyclone by NCC cadets?
Ans - All NCC cadets, both boys and girls, junior and senior along with motivated and responsible men, women
and youth volunteers can implement and supervise the activities of the contingency plan. Each group will have
distinct activities to carry out before, during and after the flood/cyclone. NCC cadets of each Gp will be trained in
various aspects as under: -
(a) Relief Group. The member of the group collect and distribute relief such as food supply,
cloth, kerosene, diesel, utensils etc and coordinate all the relief requirement of the other action groups.
Both the boy and girl cadets have to be capable of interacting with the local authorities to ensure adequate
supplies reach the affected areas in time.
(b) Warning Group. Members of this group could be cadets from JD. They have to be trained to
understand radio warning and act fast to spread the warning throughout the area of responsibility. Some
members should have a radio before the flood/cyclone. This group has to monitor weather forecast
through wireless radio, TV, transportation and communication aids are needed to pass on warning.
(c) Shelter Management Group. The members of this group can have maximum cadets from
JW/SW. They will be at the shelter and safe houses looking after the evacuees‟ food, water and
medication requirements. This group can also coordinate with the government authorities to ensure that
health and nutrition facilities are available for the extra vulnerable groups, like women and children.
(d) Evacuation and Rescue Groups. The members of this group have to be physically strong
(both SD and SW), and should be trained in basic evacuation and rescue method. The members of this
group should coordinate with state government to get facilities for rescue and evacuation in terms of
rescue training. Rescue infrastructure and equipment.
(e) First Aid Medical Groups. There should be equal number of JD/SD and JW/SW cadets in this
group. Those with some knowledge of nursing will be preferable. The members will have to go through
intensive training and drills for first aid medical reasonability.
(f) Sanitation Groups. This group can consist of girl and boy cadets, who will look after the sanitation
responsibilities both at the shelter as well as outdoors.
(g) Carcass Disposal Groups. Rotting and undisputed carcasses create unhygienic conditions and
have to be disposed off immediately. Their disposal becomes an extremely important task. The members
of this group have to be psychotically and physically able to carry out this task and should have been
medically protected. If possible the Civil Defence Volunteers, members from the NSS/boys Scouts can be
included in this group.
SECTION-9
DISASTER MANAGEMENT DURING EARTHQUAKE
Ques 1 – What is likely to be the impact of earthquakes?
Ans - (a) Loss of Life.
(b) Injury.
(c) Damage to or destruction of property including crops.
(d) Disruption of production.
(e) Disruption of lifestyle.
(f) Loss of livelihood.
(g) Disruption to essential services.
(h) Damage to national infrastructure and disruption to administrative and organisational systems.
(j) Sociological and psychological after-effects.
Ques 2 – What are the problem areas which need particular attention during relief operations?
Ans – (a) Severe and extensive damage, creating the need for urgent counter
measures especially search and rescue and medical assistance.
(b) Difficulty of access and movement.
(c) Widespread loss of or damage to infrastructure, essential services and life support systems.
(d) Recovery requirements (restoration and rebuilding) may be life extensive and costly.
(e) Occurrence of earthquake in areas where such events are rather rare may cause problems due to
lack of public awareness.
Ques 3 – What are the important points to be kept in mind by residents of quake prone area?
Ans - (a) Keep in mind that most problems from a severe earthquake result from falling objects and
debris (partial building collapse, ceiling plaster, light fixtures etc) and not from ground movement.
(b) Shelves for bookcases etc should be fixed to the walls. Remove heavy objects from shelves above
head level. Do not hang plants in heavy pots that could swing free of hooks. Bookcases, cabinets or wall
decorations can topple over and fall.
(c) Locate beds away from the windows and heavy objects that could fall. Do not hang mirrors or
picture frames over beds.
(d) Secure appliances that could move causing rupture of gas or electrical lines. Know location of
master switches and shut-of valves.
(e) Make sure the overhead lighting fixtures are well secured to the ceiling and move heavy unstable
objects away from exit routes.
(f) Replace glass bottles with plastic containers or move them to the lowest shelves.
(g) Be aware that with a severe earthquake, all services such as electricity/water will probably be
down. Emergency services may be extremely limited for a few days.
(h) Emergency stores like water, long lasting ready to eat food, first aid kit medicines tools, portable
radio, flash light, batteries, blankets, warm jackets fire extinguisher and telephone/mobile etc be kept in a
secure place at your residence or in your car.
SECTION-10
SETTING UP RELIEF CAMP DURING
DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Ques 1 - What are the basic considerations for setting up of relief camp for disaster management?
Ans – Following points are relevant for proper siting of relief camp: -
(a) Social Needs. In most circumstances the choice will be limited and any land meeting even
minimum standards may be scarce. However the site selected must meet the basic needs of the society.
(b) Water. The single most important site selection criteria are the availability of an adequate amount of
water on a year-round basis. The watershed of the area may be a consideration.
(c) Open Space. The site must provide a sufficient amount of usable space for the displaced
population. Since there is always the possibility that more people may arrive, the site should be large
enough to allow for major expansion
(d) Accessibility. The site must be accessible by vehicles and close to communication links,
sources of supplies and services such as food, cooking fuel, shelter material, and national community
services.
(e) Environment. The area should be free of major environmental health hazards, potential diseases
and harmful insects such as mosquito and tsetse fly.
(f) Soil and Ground Cover. The soil should allow for water absorption and the retention of human
waste. Rocky or impermeable sites should be avoided.
(g) Land Rights. The land should be exempt from ownership rights or grazing and other uses
by local population.
(h) Transit Centre. There may be a need to set up a reception or transit centre, through which
displaced people pass on the way to a long-term settlement site
SECTION-11
ASSISTANCE IN REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
Ques 1 - What should be the ideal priority for removal of debris?
Ans (a) Priority I. To remove debris that may damage entry and exit for emergency services,
public health and safety.
(b) Priority II. To remove debris that poses a threat to life and safety, e.g. damage to public
structures, bridges and road ways.
(c) Priority III. To remove debris that cause hindrance to the process of rehabilitation of
disaster affected area.
(d) Priority IV. To remove debris on private property.
Ques 2 - What is the likely role of NCC cadets for removal of debris?
Ans - NCC Cadets could be employed as under : -
(a) Spread public awareness about task in hand to enhance participation.
(b) Remove debris in conjunction with civil services.
(c) For identification of disposal areas and as guides.
(d) Reporting/controlling of illegal dumping activity.
SECTION-12
COLLECTION AND DISTRIBUTION OF AID MATERIAL

Ques 1 – What are the various types of Aid materials required during management of disasters?
Ans - Aid material can be divided into following categories: -
(a) Personal Clothing and bedding Items.
(b) Medical and Life Saving Equipment
(c) Housing and Shelters.
(d) Transportation.
(e) Debris Clearing Equipment.
(f) Animals and Live Stock.
(g) Disposal of the Dead.
(h) Communication.
(j) Food, Water and Cooking Facilities.
(k) Electricity and Lighting Facilities.
Ques 2 – what is the source of supply of aid material?
Ans - (a) Central Government Organisations including Defence Services.
(b) State Government Organisations.
(c) Non Government Organisations (NGOs).
(d) Educational Institutions.
(e) Social Welfare Organisations.
(f) Resident Welfare Organisations.
(g) Red Cross.
(h) International Organisations like WHO etc.
(j) Individuals.
Ques 3 - What is the role of NCC cadets for collection of aid material?
Ans – (a) Cadets can help at the time of collection and help in maintaining records
(b) Help in the sifting of articles and bulk breaking and packaging.
(c) Help in dispatch of items by various means.
(d) NCC can establish their own collection and distribution centres as they are closely associated with
schools and colleges all over the country and even in the remotest areas of our country. These can be
opened at unit/ group level.
(e) NCC is working and coordinating with government at the central and also at the state and district
level and thus by their disposition they are ideally suited for a parallel net work with other organisations.
Ques 4 - What is the role of NCC cadets for distribution of aid material?
Ans - (a) Can be co-opted with the PDS system.
(b) Work along with NGOs or other organisations.
(c) Work independently in the chain of NCC collection and distribution system.
(d) Work along with Defence Forces who are major contributors in crisis management.
(e) Operate and man various posts established for escorting and guiding delivery agents with
adequate signal communications.
SECTION-13
MESSAGE SERVICES
Ques 1 – What are various methods of communications?
Ans - (a) Messengers.
(b) Telephones including Cell phones.
(c) Two-way radio (VHF).
(d) Field Telephone.
(e) Signal transmission through propagation of waves as follows:-
(i) Ground Wave. Long and Medium waves range upto 30 Kms.
(ii) Space Wave. VHF and UHF waves range upto 50Kms.
(iii) Sky Wave. HF waves making use of ionosphere layer existing upto a height of 150-
200 Kms from the surface of the earth. Range from 100 Kms to 1000 Kms
(iv) Tropospheric Scatter. For forward propagation height range upto 8-10 Kms from the
surface of the earth.
(f) Satellite.
(g) Dial-up modems (Internet including e-mail and Fax).
(h) Local Area Networks (LANs).
(j) Signals.
Ecology-Nature Awareness
ENVIRONMENT AND ECOLOGY
SECTION 1-WHAT IS ENVIRONMENT?
Ques 1. Define environment?
Ans - The conditions in which an organism exists make up its environment.
Ques 2. What are the affects of environment degradation?
Ans – (a) Global warming.
(b) Acid Rain
(c) Depletion of ozone layer.
Ques 3. What is the role of NCC cadets towards environmental degradation?
Ans – NCC Cadets can take following actions to curb environmental degradation: -
(a) Tree plantation.
(b) Guide and motivate family and friends to control environmental degradation.
(c) Water conservation
(d) Disposal of waste

(e) Educate the people
SECTION 2-WHAT IS ECOLOGY?
Ques 1. Define ecology?
Ans - The science which deals with the study of the eco-system is called ecology.
Ques 2 – What is green house affect?
Ans - It is the effect arising due to increased carbon dioxide content and increase in global temperature and
depletion of ozone layer due to chlorofluorocarbons used, poses the greatest threat to the very existence and
survival of human beings and flora and fauna around the globe.
SECTION 3- CONSERVATION OF ENVIRONMENT AND ECOLOGY
Ques 1. What measure the youth should adopt to check environmental degradation?
Ans - Following measures must be taken by youth : -
(a) Keeping air, land, rivers, and water bodies clean and natural.
(b) Tree plantation and stoppage of indiscriminate felling of trees.
(c) Prevention of wastage and over-use of all natural resources.
(d) Re-using industrial wastes.
(e) Consumption of non-renewable resources by using renewable resources as far as possible.
(f) Modern sewage disposal techniques.
(g) Restrictions on using chemical substances and toxins harmful to soil, water and air.
(h) Fumes, smoke and exhaust gases to be rendered harmless by innovative design of machinery and
technology.
(j) Treatment of effluents.
(k) Observing strict emission levels.
(l) Elimination of nuclear waste.
(m) All waste to be biodegradable.
(n) Non-biodegradable waste to be recycled
(o) Water bodies to be kept chaste.
(p) Protection of nature in all forms.
(q) Protection of all life-forms.
(r) Strict policies, regulations and incentives for protection and conservation of nature and life-forms.
(s) Impetus to Research and Development for environment-friendly technology.
(t) All development involving the bio-sphere to be environment-friendly with ecological harmony or
“Economic Development on Ecological Principles”
(u) Management of environmental pollution, at all levels including homes, such as smoke, use of
sprays, garbage disposal, non-bio-degradable waste, water pollution.
(v) Protection of wild life.
(w) Checking human population explosion.
(x) Cleanliness drives for rivers, water-bodies and soil (to remove non-bio-degradable).
(y) Ensuring environmentally rational behaviour in oneself and others.
(z) Developing environmental consciousness amongst common people through classroom

instructions, posters and hoardings, public and media campaigns.
SECTION 4- POLLUTION AND ITS CONTROL
Ques 1. Define pollution?
Ans - Pollution is defined as imbalance in the atmosphere caused by pollutants.
Ques 2 – What are the various kinds of pollution?
Ans - It is of following kinds : -
(a) Land Pollution
(b) Air Pollution
(c) Water Pollution
(d) Sound Pollution
Ques 3 – How is water pollution caused?
Ans - It is caused by following means: -
(a) Discharge of domestic waste.
(b) Discharge of industrial waste
(c) Discharge of agricultural waste
Ques 4 - What measures the NCC cadets adopt to control pollution?
Ans - (a) To develop consciousness among common people to control all pollution. Plant more and
more trees.
(b) The use of loud horns or mindless blowing of horns by motor vehicles should be banned
(c) The water bodies should not be used as waste reservoirs.
(d) Various sources of drinking water, and water resources should be well protected so that dirty water
does not enter these water bodies.
(e) Environmental education should be made compulsory in all educational institutions.
(f) Excessive use of pesticides and insecticides should be avoided.
(g) In all towns and cities there should be proper arrangement of dustbins to collect garbage being
produced in the houses.
(h) In the factories strict precaution should be instituted to avoid pollution of various types.
(j) Running of old and pollution emitting vehicle should be banned.
(k) The pollution control Administrative Authorities must have independent powers to implement their
decisions
SECTION 5- FOREST ECOLOGY AND POLLUTION
Ques 1 - What is the importance of forests?
Ans - Forests are our natural resources. They have a vital role in maintaining a balanced & healthy eco-system.
Forests help in global recycling of water, oxygen, carbon-dioxide and nitrogen in a balanced way.
Ques 2 – What is the influence of forests on ecology and pollution?
Ans - (a) Forests control the pollution of all types and maintains healthy eco-system.
(b) Maintains balance between the oxygen and carbon dioxide for quality environment.
(c) Carbohydrates synthesised by the forest plants are a major source of energy consumed by
herbivores feeding on plants and carnivores feeding on herbivores
(d) Checks floods, draught and soil erosion.
(e) Forests control humidity of the environment and regulate the weather conditions.
(f) Forests bring down the temperature and maintain favourable weather conditions.
(g) The forests protect balance between flora and fauna, thus keep the balance in nature.
SECTION 6- WILD LIFE
Ques 1 - What is the main reasons for extinction of certain plant and animal species?
Ans - (a) Destruction of their natural habitats
(b) Over-grazing by domestic animals
(c) Poaching for meat, skin, fur, ivory, rhino horn etc.
(d) Export of some species.
Ques 2 – How to manage and protect the wild life in India?
Ans - (a) Protection of natural habitats through control of exploitation.
(b) Maintenance of protected areas like parks, sanctuaries, reserve forests.
(c ) Protection through legislation .
(d) Impose restrictions on export of rare plants and animals.
(e) Encourage Non-Government Organisations to participate in protection of wild life.
(f) Spread general awareness among the masses.

National Integration
SECTION 1
INDIAN HISTORY AND CULTURE
Ques 1. List out the important periods of Indian History?
Ans - Relevant details are as under: -
(a) Harappan Culture. First urban culture to flourish in India.
(b) Vedic age. It was the result of the inter- mixing of the Indo - Aryans with the pre-existing inhabitants of India.
(c) Jainism & Buddhism. 6th century BC to 200 BC. Both religions had lasting impact on life and culture of India.
(d) Period from 200 BC to 300 AD. This phase is extremely important since the changes that took place in economic and
political life, and significant developments in various aspects of culture including religion, art and science and technology.
(e) 4th AD to 8th century - Classical age of Indian civilization. The Guptas built a large kingdom during this period
which remained powerful for about a century. In the Deccan and the South, there were two major Kingdoms during this period
of the Pallavas and of the Chalukyas. Some of the finest achievements in various fields of culture-art, architecture, literature,
philosophy, science, technology can, however, be dated to this period.
(f) In spite of the dominant position of Sanskrit in most part of the country. This period marks the beginning of many
modern Indian languages as well as distinct scripts in different parts of the country. The period is also important for some of
the most significant advances in science and technology. Most of the major works in astronomy, mathematics and medicine
belong to this period.
(g) The medieval period. 8th to 17th century. Creation of large number of states, Induction of Islam, emergence of
Brahmini & Vijaynagram kingdoms in south, Establishment of Sultanate of Delhi, unification of North and South under
Mughals like Ashoka earlier, Akbar, the greatest of the Mughal emperors, followed a policy of sulk- kul (peace with all).
(h) The modern period 18th century saw decline of Mughals and colonisation by British began. Freedom struggle, partition and
independence of India are important events of this period.
Ques 2. Why is the period 4th to 8th century called 'classical age' of Indian civilisation?
Ans - It is due to the following : -
(a) Guptas remained powerful for almost for one century.
(b) Pallavas and chaulukyas were major kingdoms of Deccan and south.
(c) Some of the finest achievements in various fields of culture-art, architecture, literature, philosophy, science,
technology are dated to this period.
(d) Decline of Buddhism and rise of Brahminical religion.
(e) Sanskrit was language of court in major parts of the country and beginning of many modern Indian languages.
(f) The period is also important for some of the most significant advances in science and technology. Most of the major works in
astronomy, mathematics and medicine belong to this period.
Ques 3. What are various dimensions of Indian culture?
Ans - Various different races have been coming to India and on entering India; they had conflicts with the local inhabitants. These conflicts
affected their respective cultures and through the process of assimilation and synthesis, Indian culture grew all the richer. Various races which
came to India are as under ;-
(a) Negrito Race.
(b) Dravidians.
(c) Aryans.
(d) Muslims.
(e) British.
(f) The present form of administration in India is the outcome of the great influence of the British ideology. The present
economic organization, joint stock companies, managing agencies, big factories, production through machines, railways,
telegraphs, telephone, aeroplanes and other means of conveyance and communication were brought to India from the west.
SECTION 2- RELIGIONS AND CUSTOMS OF INDIA

Ques 1. What are the major Indian religions and percentage of population?
Ans - (a) Hindus - 83.5 %
(b) Muslims - 10.7 %
(c ) Christians - 2.44 %
(d) Sikhs - 1.79 %
(e) Buddhists - 0.74 %
(f) Jains - 0.46 %
(g) Others - 0.37 %
Ques 2. The customs of India depict very colourful panorama. What are your comments?
Ans. It is due to the following: -
(a) India is a multiracial, multilingual civilization with rich cultural heritage and has provided peaceful atmosphere for the
development of many religions. Indian culture and customs are influenced by these religions.
(b) Indian festivals are famous the world over. Most of the festivals are related to the change of weather and crop harvesting
since India is an agro based economy. The most famous Indian festivals are Diwali, Holi, Dussehra and Basant Panchami. There are
certain festivals which are prevalent in particular regions only like Bihu in Assam, Baishakhi in Punjab etc.
(c) There are different customs of Hindu marriage as compared to a Muslim marriage or a Sikh marriage. Similarly there are
different customs of celebrations. There are certain religious customs which pertain to particular religion only like Mundan ceremony in
Hindus and Naming ceremony in Sikhs.
(d) There are certain customs regarding dresses and ornaments of women. These are associated with particular regions which
give a very colourful dimension to Indian customs and traditions, similarly all regions have their distinctive ornaments.
(e) The customs and traditions of India though varied are binding which ultimately serves as a unifying factor of Secular India.
SECTION 3- UNITY IN DIVERSITY

Ques 1. What is the importance of national unity?
Ans - National unity is also essential for social wellbeing, peace and harmony. People can enjoy peace and security, if there is a mutual trust
and goodwill among all sections of society. No progress can be made in the field of art & literature, science & cultural advancement and
economic well-being, if the disruptive tendencies and divisive forces are present in the country. Nation can play an effective role in the
international field if our own house in order.
Ques 2 - What are the fundamentals of national unity?
(a) Language.
(b) Casteism.
(c) Education.
(d) Communalism.
(e) Regionalism.
Ques 3 - What is the relevance of NCC in unifying India and what are the important ingredients of national unity?
Ans - NCC creates awareness amongst youth about the diverse heritage of our country and fosters national integration despite linguistic,
cultural, religious and geographical barriers. It helps cadets to gain experience to live together, co-operate with each other and work in
harmony amongst cadets of various states, thus strengthening unity. Important ingredients of national unity are as under: -
(a) Ethics and social values.
(b) Cultural and traditional values.
(c) Discipline and patriotism.
SECTION 4- NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND ITS IMPORTANCE
Ques 1. Define national integration.

Ans - National integration is a positive concept to inculcate feeling of togetherness amongst diverse sections of society. It is not the uniformity
of all religions, dress and food habits etc. It means both preservation of diverse cultures and at the same time living, respecting and working in
harmony with each other for the overall prosperity of the nation.
Ques 2. Why is national integration important for progress of any nation?
Ans. It is important for the following: -
(a) Maintenance of sovereignty and territorial integrity of the nation.
(b) Maintenance of peace and harmony.
(c ) Growth and development of the nation.
(d) Eradication of poverty and illiteracy.
(e) Internal security and law and order.
(f) Culture and religious development.
(g) Economic and industrial growth.
(h) Attract foreign investment and increase import and export.
(j) Exchange of technological know-how and culture .
(k) Dignity and self respect as a nation.
(l) Welfare and well-being of the people.
(m) Foreign relations and better standing among the nations of the world.
SECTION 5
FAMOUS LEADERS OF INDIA
Ques 1. Mahatma Gandhi, Bhagat Singh, Lal Bahadur Shastri, Chander Shekhar Azad, Subash Chandra Bose, Swami Vivekanand ,
Jawaharlal Nehru , Maulana Abul Kalam Azad and Sardar Vallabh Bhai Patel.
Ans. Study the Precis for complete details
SECTION 6
INDIA'S NEIGHBOURS
Ques 1. What are the favourable points in the developing Indo-China relations?
(a) Neighbours and huge human infrastructure.
(b) Age old religious & cultural ties with regular exchange of delegations.
(c) Agriculture with strong industrial base.
(d) Fastest growing economies.
(e) Opening of trade routes.
(f) Nuclear power and emerging space technology.
(g) Growing relations in the fields of culture, education, economy, science and
Technology.
(h) Perpetual friendship treaty of Pachsheel based on five principles of peace.
Ques No 2. What are the hurdles in the Indo-china relations?
Ans - These are as under :
(a) Difference of ideology i.e. Democracy vs Communism.
(b) Persisting border dispute.
(c) Chinese war of 1962.
(d) Suppression of Tibetan freedom.
(e) Increasing nuclear capability and weapons of mass destruction by China.
(f) Helping Pakistan militarily.
Ques 3. What are the favourable points in the Indo-Nepal relations?
(a) Historical cultural and religious ties.
(b) Increasing co-operation in the fields of Agriculture, Agro-based industries, tourism,
processing of cash crops, science and technology.
(c) Establishment of industrial units with the help of India.
(d) Construction of Devighat Hydro-electric Project in Nepal during 1985.
Ques 4. What are the favourable points in the Indo-Bhutan relations?
(a) Ties of religion, culture and friendship between people of both countries.
(b) India is responsible for security and communication in Bhutan.
(c) Development of education, technical skills and economy of Bhutan.
(d) Continuous economic, industrial and military aid to Bhutan.
Ques 5. What are the favourable points in the Indo-Myanmar relations?
(a) Strong cultural and ties since time immemorial.
(b) Common border and perpetual security problems.
(c) Both countries agreed to check drug trafficking and unlawful activities on the
borders.
(d) Regular exchange between the dignitaries of both nations to resolve problems of
mutual interest.
Ques 6. What are the hurdles in the Indo-Myanmar relations?
(a) Military rule and constant suppression of democracy in Myanmar.
(b) Dismal poverty & stoppage of international aid.
(c) Many NE insurgent groups operate from Myanmar.
(d) Porous border is conduit for supply of drugs to India.
Ques 7. What are the favourable points in the Indo-Bangladesh relations?
(a) India helped Bangladesh to achieve independence.
(b) Financial and technical assistance for development programmes in Bangladesh.
(c) Indian Army helped people of Bangladesh in their genuine struggle against oppression
and domination by West Pakistan.
Ques 8. What are the hurdles in the Indo-Bangladesh relations?
(a) Influx of immigration of Bangladeshis into India.
(b) Shelter to NE insurgent groups in Bangladesh.
(c) Poor, over-populated and ill-governed nation.
(d) Increasing influence of fundamentalists in society.
(e) Increase in Al-Qaeda and ISI backed groups.
Ques 9. What are the favourable points in the Indo-Sri Lankan relations?
(a) Age old cultural and religious ties.
(b) Constant co-operation in the spheres of economic, peace and friendship.
(c) Being close maritime neighbour it is in India's interest that political and social
stability returns to Sri Lanka.
Ques 10. What are the hurdles in the Indo-Pakistan relations?
(a) Constant tension & strained relations after partition leading to four wars of 1949, 1965, 1971 and kargil war of 1999.
(b) Raising Kashmir bogey in international fora repeatedly.
(c) Fomenting trouble in India in various forms.
(d) Supporting militant groups from its soil against India.
(e) Suppression of democracy and military rule in Pakistan.
Ques 11. What are the favourable points in the Indo-Pakistan relations?
(a) Same heritage, culture and ancestry.
(b) Common food habits, strengths and concerns of populace.
(c) Shared water resources.
(d) Increasing people to people contacts.
(e) Increasing confidence building measures.
(f) Disenchantment of common people with the military and fundamentalists groups.
SECTION 7
CONTRIBUTION OF YOUTH FOR NATION BUILDING
Ques 1. Define role of youth in nation building?
Ans - Youth is the backbone, hope of the future, potent tools of national integration and reckonable force to shape the destiny of the nation.
The youth can play a leading role in bringing together the people of different states and religions with a view to
integrating them emotionally, culturally and geographically.
Ques 2. How can youth contribute individually for nation building?
Ans - (a) Be good human being by imbibing Oriental value system.
(b) Help the friends & colleagues from unprivileged section of society.
(c) Improve personal talent, innovate and enhance your usefulness for society and Nation.
(d) Discourage corruption in every form and manifestation in society.
(e) Participate in sports, yoga and improve personal health.
(f) Use national/natural resources like, energy in all forms, communication spectrum, water resources etc with due austerity and
discourage its misuse by others.
(g) Develop secular outlook and tolerance for all sections of society.
(h) Extend willing help to civil administration during natural and man made disasters.
(i) Learn healthy politics during college days.
Ques 3. Youth can contribute for nation building at personal level by saying 'no' to what all social evils?
Ans - (a) Drugs
(b) Dowry
(c) Illicit sexual relations
(d) Antisocial activities in thought and action.
(e) Exploitation of underprivileged in society.
(f) Use of child labour
(g) Unfair means during exams.
(h) Accepting and offering bride in all forms
Ques 4 - Youth can contribute for nation building at personal level by saying â€˜yesâ€™ to which all good personal habits?
Ans - (a) Avoid rash driving.
(b) Carry driving license and helmet always.
(c) Follow road etiquettes and road safety norms explicitly.
(d) Don't use mob while driving and no over speeding.
(e) Extend willing help during natural and man made disasters.
(f) Organise traffic control during accidents.
(g) Plant trees on special occasions like birth of daughter, birthday of other Nears and Dears, anniversaries etc and prevent extravaganza
by all means.
(j) Help and look after aging parents
(k) Groom & nurture your children so that they become responsible citizens of the nation.
(l) As responsible citizens, employees, entrepreneurs & Govt servants, ensure punctuality, excellence, simple
living and high thinking.
(m) Help your colleagues from under privileged section of society.
SECTION 8- NATION STATE, NATIONAL INTEREST AND OBJECTIVE

(Only for SD/SW Cadets)
Ques 1 - Define nation state.
Ans - Nation State can be defined as a country which has essential elements of population, territory, sovereignty and Government.
Ques 2. What are the national interests of a Nation?
Ans - National interests are as under:-
(a) Sovereignty. Foremost interest of the nation is to be autonomous and remain independent.
(b) Integrity. The nation should be full, indivisible and have a well-defined territory.
(c) Unity. The nation should be a secular union of states with political power belonging to a central confederate
authority, with united and undivided goals without factional , sectarian or fanatical prejudices. It should be tolerant towards caste,
colour, creed, religion and language of each other.
(d) Security. The nation must ensure safety, territorial integrity and protection of the state against external threat or subversion.
Ques 3. What are the important Directive principles of state Policy?
Ans (a) To ensure and protect a social order which stands for the welfare of the people.
(b) Separation of judiciary from the executive.
(c) Protection of national monuments.
(e) Protection and improvement in environment, forests and wild life.
(f) Organise agriculture and animal husbandry on modern and scientific lines.
(g) Improvement of public health.
(h) Prohibition of intoxicating drinks and drugs.
(j) Promotion of educational and economic interests of weaker sections of the people.
(k) To have uniform code of law irrespective of caste, creed, colour or religion.
(l) Participation of workers and labourers in labour law.
(m) Promotion of cottage industries.
(n) Provision of maternity relief.
(o) Education to all.
(p) Equal justice to all.
(q) Equal pay for equal work for both men and women.
(r) Adequate means of livelihood to all citizens.
Ques 4. What are the current objectives of India?
Ans - (a) Self sufficiency in nuclear- power.
(b) Availability of reliable power supply for farming and industries.
(c) Production of goods for world markets.
(d) Balancing growth in both public and private sector.
(e) Modernization of villages, linking with roads and provision of electricity to all villages.
Part II (Special Syllabus)
Field Craft and Battle Craft

SECTION-1
INTRODUCTION TO FIELD CRAFT
AND
BATTLE CRAFT
Ques 1 - Define Field craft?
Ans - Field Craft is an art of using the ground and the weapon available to the best of one's own advantages.
Ques 2. What all subjects are included in Field craft?
Ans - (a) Description of Ground.
(b) Observation and concealment.
(c) Judging distance.

(d) Recognition and description of targets.
(e) Movement with and without Arms
Ques 3. What are the advantages of battle craft?
Ans - Useful in tackling minor tactical problems without confusion but the basic knowledge of field signals, section & platoon formations is
essential.
Ques 4. What all subjects are included in Battle Craft?
Ans - (a) Field signals.
(b) Section formation
(c) Fire control orders.
(d) Fire and movements.
(e) Section battle drills.
FIELD CRAFT
SECTION-2
DESCRIPTION OF GROUND
Ques 1 - What are the various type of grounds?
Ans (a) Broken Ground. It is uneven and is generally interspersed with nullahs, bumps and
field in the ground. It is suitable for move of infantry and hinders observation of activities.
(b) Flat and Open Ground. It is even ground with little cover e.g. bushes, hedges and
similar foliage. It is not suitable for move of Infantry by day.
(c) High Ground. Ground far above the general level of the area e.g. hill. It facilitates
domination of area around it by observation or fire or both.
(d) Dead Ground. Ground that is hidden from an observer's view. It can not be covered
by flat trajectory weapons.
Ques 2. What is the procedure for description of ground?
Ans - (a) Fore Ground Up to 300 yards
(b) Middle Distance From 300 yards to 500 yards
(c) Distance Beyond 500 yards
Ques 3. What is the procedure for indication of ground?
Ans - (a) General Line of Direction. Start by giving the general line of direction by pointing out
a centrally located, if possible, prominent land mark, e.g. No 1 section 500 RED HOUSE,
(b) Boundaries. After giving general line of direction give LEFT and RIGHT boundaries of
your area e.g.
(i) No. 1 section 'Aadha baen 600 PILI JHONPRI nam JHONPRI section ke baen
wale jawan se JHONPRI tak ki line baen had'.
(ii) Similarly indicate right boundary.

(iii) Dived the ground into fore ground, middle and distance. Having done so start
from LEFT to RIGHT systematically and describe.
(iv) In attack describe the ground nearest to you first i.e. foreground, then middle
and then distance, in defence reverse the procedure.
SECTION-3
OBSERVATION AND CONCEALMENT
Ques 1. What is the importance of observation and concealment?
Ans - (a) A soldier who is trained in both can locate and kill his enemy without being seen himself.
(b) Ground observation of enemy provides one of the most valuable sources of information
on which the plans of higher commanders are based.
(c) In defence good concealment enables a defender to mystify and deceive the enemy and
in the event of an attack repel the enemy by producing fire at close range from an
unexpected quarter.
Ques 2. What are the fundamentals for correct use of cover?
Ans - (a) Whenever possible look through the cover and not over it.
(b) If it is not possible to look through the cover, look round it rather than over it.
(c) It is necessary to look over the cover, avoid breaking straight line.
(d) The sky-line is the worst background you could choose, but if you can not avoid
observing over the cover and against the sky line, use something to break your silhouette.
(e) When firing from inside a building keep well back making use of the shadow.
(f) A rough, dark and irregular background which matches your clothing, providesconsiderable cover from view.
(g) Isolated cover is dangerous because it will attract attention of the enemy and can be easily indicated in a fire order.
(h) Avoid sky line.
(j) Avoid regular spacing.
(k) Avoid gaps for fire position.
(l) Cross gaps as a body and at irregular interval at the double.
SECTION 4
JUDGING DISTANCE
Ques 1. What are the various methods of judging distance?
Ans - (a) Unit of measure.
(b) Appearance method.
(c) Section average.
(d) Key ranges.
(e) Halving.
(f) Bracketing
Ques 2. When the distances are over-estimated?
Ans - (a) Light is bad.
(b) The sun is in the observer's eye.
(c) The object is small in relation to its surroundings.
(d) Looking through a valley of narrow lane e.g. street.

(e) Lying down.
Ques 3 - When the distances are under-estimated?
Ans (a) The light is bright.
(b) The object is large in relation to its surrounding.
(c) There is some dead ground between observer and the object.
(d) Looking up hill.
SECTION-5
RECOGNITION, DESCRIPTION AND
INDICATION OF TARGETS
Ques 1 - Define target and land mark?
Ans - (a) Target. It is an object which is indicated with a view to bring down fire on it,
whenever required.
(b) Landmarks. Landmark is an object which is indicated and used in the embodiment of
operation orders.
Ques 2. Describe method of indication of easy target?

Ans - (a) Indication by Description. An obvious target can often be described directly. For example 'No. 1 Section
BRIDGE' Here BRIDGE is so obvious that no body can make a mistake in recognizing it.
(b) Indication by Direction or Range or Both. In slightly less obvious cases other aids should be used e.g. direction or range or
both. An example of each is given below:-
(i) Indication by Direction. No 1 Section BAEN BGHICHA.
(ii) Indication by Range. No 1 Section 600 BAGHICHA.
(iii) Direction and Range. When indicting a landmark indicate direction first and than range e.g. BAEN-600, BAGHICHA.
Ques 3 - What is the sequence of targets?
Ans - The easy way to remember this sequence is to remember the word 'GRAD'. The sequence is as follows:-
(a) Designation of Group.
(b) Range.
(c) Aid.
(d) Description
Ques 4. How to measure degree with hand?
Ans - Hand Angles. This is a rough method which is sufficiently accurate for practical purposes.The various degree measurements are given
in the diagrams below. Remember to keep the left (LEFT) hand fully stretched and tilt it in the required direction. As the size of hand varies
considerably the figures given below are approximate only. Each person should with the help of a degree scale check his hand for degrees.
SECTION-6
MOVEMENT WITH & WITHOUT ARMS
(ONLY FOR SW)
Ques 1 - What is the various methods of movement by Rifle and LMG?
Ans - (a) Crawling by Day with Rifle
(i) Monkey run.
(ii) Leopard crawl
(iii) Walk.
(iv) Roll.
(b) Crawling by Day with LMG
(i) Knee crawl.
(ii) Side crawl.
(iii) Leopard crawl.
(c) Crawling by Night
(i) Ghost walk.
(ii) Cat walk.
(iii) Kitten crawl.
Ques 2 - What all points must be remembered while making movements?
Ans - (a) Move from cover to cover and make use of natural camouflage. Stop, observe and listen from bound to bound and do not
keep moving forward the whole time.
(b) Watch your front and flanks.
(c) Crawl slows the movement and hiders observation, therefore crawl only when you must. After crawling for some distance
stop, listen and observe and then crawl further.
(d) Weapons must always be kept ready for use.
(e) Look carefully and all round for enemy.
(f) Double across small gaps.
(g) If shot at, drop and crawl away to a side.
(h) Check equipment for noise.
(j) Always consider an alternative route.
(k) Do not disturb the birds, if this can be helped.
BATTLE CRAFT
SECTION-7
FIELD SIGNALS
Ques 1. Describe various Hand signals?
Ans - These are tabulated as under : -
Ser Action Signal
No
(a) Deploy Right arm fully extended above head and waved from side to side, palm
open.
(b) Advance Right arm swung from rear to front in 'under arm blowing' fashion
(c) Halt Right arm raised to full extent above head

(d) Turn about Right arm raised and bent above head.
(e) Change Direction Right arm raised to front in line with shoulder. Body then turned in required
direction.
(f) Close Right hand place on top of head, elbow to the right.
(g) Quick Time Right hand raised to line of shoulder, elbow close to the side.
(h) Double March Right fist clenched, moved up and down between thigh and shoulder
several times.
(j) Follow me Right arm swung from rear to front above the shoulder, in 'over arm
bowling' fashion.
(k) Last order completed Right hand to salute, then arm raised in air finger extended.
(l) Last order Not Both hands, cupped behind the ears.
understood
(m) Commander to close Right arm to the side at 45 degrees to the body, first
clenched.
(n) Enemy in sight specific Both arms waved on sides 'Bird fashion' followed by number, indicated
numbers by number of fingers held up.
(o) Enemy Approaching Both hands open, palm inwards at waist level, with inwards scooping
motion.
(p) Enemy position Both hands, first clenched, raised to shoulder level, followed by indication
suspected of direction.
(q) Enemy LMG firing Right hand thumb down signal.
(r) Engage Target by Fire Both hands clasped above the head (boxer fashion).
(s) Attack Punching motion with Right or Left hand according to direction of attack.
(t) Closed to Rendezvous Close sign followed by both hands clasped in front of body at waist level.
(u) Infantry obstacle ahead Both hands crossed in front of body at the waist, palm open downwards.
Ques 1. Describe various signals with weapon and whistle?
Ans
Signals With Weapons
3. (a) Enemy in Sight in small Rifle held above the head parallel to the ground, muzzle in
number the direction of the enemy.
(b) Enemy in Sight in large As per (a) above, but arm moved up and down several
number times.
(c) Advance Both arms raised to form the letter 'U'.
Signals With Whistle
4. (a) Cautionary Blast A short blast to draw attention to a signal or order about to
be given.
(b) The Alarm Blast A succession of alternate long and short whistle.
(c) Enemy Aircraft A succession of short blasts.
(d) Enemy Aircraft Two long blasts repeated at interval of five second.
departed
SECTION- 8
SECTION FORMATION
Ques 1 - What are the tactical groups of section?
Ans - (a) LMG group
(b) Rifle group.
Ques 2. Describe various section formations along with advantages and disadvantages?
Ans -
Ser Formation Advantage Disadvantage
No
(a) Single File Good for control, not vulnerable to enfilade Bad for fire production,
fire, useful for moving along ditches, narrow vulnerable to frontal fire.
defiles and so on.
(b) File. Good for control. Useful for moving along Not good for fire
broad roads, wide nullahs andso on. production, vulnerable
to frontal fire.
(c) Diamond. Good for control, not vulnerable to enfilade Present a good target
fire, good for all round fireproduction and to frontal fire. Not very
observation. good for fire production to
the front.
(d) Arrow-head Good depth, not vulnerable to frontal fire, Control more difficult
good for fire production, probably the best than in diamond.
formation for crossing open ground.
(e) Spread-head Good depth, less vulnerable to enfilade fire Control difficult. Delay
than arrow head, LMG group not committed in fire production.
immediately on contact.
(f) Extended Line The formation used in the final assault. Very Control difficult. Very
good for fire production (from the hip) vulnerable to enfilade
and bayonet fighting. fire, no depth.
SECTION-9
FIRE AND MOVEMENT
Ques 1 - What are the basic considerations for fire and movement?
Ans - (a) There should be no exposed ground without covering fire.
(b) Control by the commander.
(c) The angle of covering fire from direct firing weapons should be as wide as possiblewithout loss of control or time.
(d) Full use should be made of all available cover. When cover is lacking the use ofsmoke (smoke grenade) should be considered.
(e) Full use should be made of all available weapons for covering fire.
Ques 2. How the ground should be appreciated?
Ans - It should be appreciated under the following headings:-
(a) Fire positions
(b) Observation positions.
(c) Cover from fire.
(d) Cover from view.
(e) Obstacles.
Ques 3. What are the common mistakes in the use of ground?
Ans - (a) Carelessness by troops while making a reconnaissance, such as unfolding a
map inthe open or not using a covered approach to an OP.
(b) Unnecessary movement in a position overlooked by the enemy.
(c) Using conspicuous landmarks such as isolated trees, bushes or cottages.
(d) Halting troops near road or track junctions or other mapped features which arealways registered as targets by the enemy.
(e) Bad track discipline.
(f) Failure to guard against enemy air observation.
Ques 4 - What are the ideal points for selection of Fire positions?
Ans - (a) Provide cover from fire.
(b) Provide cover from fire.
(c) Afford a good view of the ground to be watched or target to be engaged.
(d) Provide room in which to use the weapon freely.
(e) Have a covered approach.
(f) Be easy to advance from.
SECTION-10
SECTION BATTLE DRILL
Ques 1. What are the stages of section battle drill?
Ans - The Section Battle Drill is divided into 4 stages.
(a) Stage 1 - Action on coming under effective fire.
(b) Stage II- Locating and neutralizing the enemy.
(c) Stage III - Attack.
(d) Stage IV- Re-organization
Ques 2 - What drill will be followed for locating and neutralizing the enemy?
Ans - (a) By Observation. Look in the area from which the 'thump' came. The time between the 'crack' and the 'thump' gives an
indication of the range. If nothing is seen after about 30 seconds or so, it is very unlikely that enemy will be located by looking.
(b) By Fire. The section commander will give a fire control order to a couple of rifleman to fire two shots each into likely
cover. The rest of the section will observe their area ofobservation carefully. If there is no answer to fire, then the section commander
should try another couple of rifleman at some other target. If there is still no enemy fire, either they are well trained or they have
withdrawn.
(c) By Movement. The section commander will order one or two men to get up and double forward about 10 yards to a
different cover. He might do this again if it draws no fire. If the enemy troops are there, they must be extremely well trained not to fall
for these tricks and start firing at such poor targets. (A man getting up and moving fast for about 10 yards is a very difficult target to
hit). If there is still no enemy reaction then the section commander must continue the advance.
Ques 3 - What are the important points during assault of section?
Ans - (a) The section commander will lead the rifle group in person, he is normally in the centre.
(b) Covering fire will be provided for all movements in the open. The angle of the fire should be as wide as possible.
(c) When the rifle group gets down into fire position after a bound, the LMG group must move forward into a new fire position
automatically. Once the LMG group is in a position from which it can support the assault from a good angle, the rifle group will move
in one bound. Before the assault goes in, the rifleman armed with the grenade discharger cup and the projector strim grenade should
be ordered to remove these from their rifle, if necessary.
(d) Normally the assault will start at the 'walk' with firing being carried out from the shoulder or the hip (marching fire). The
section doubles only during last 100 to 50 yards when the section commander gives order 'CHARGE'.
(e) No 1 and No 2 of the LMG group must carry sufficient magazines to support a normal section attack.
(f) As the assault goes in, the LMG group will fire as long as possible and then switch its fire across the objective just in front of
the rifle group.
Ques 4 - What are the important points during Reorganisation?
Ans - (a) The LMG group will rejoin the fire group 'at the double' immediately it sees the rifle group take cover after the assault.
(b) The section commander will organize a search of the area of the objective for any enemy hiding or wounded. Rifle numbers
detailed to search will be covered by other rifleman.
(c) The section commander will check positions of rifleman and LMG group, allot arcs of observation and detail reference
points.
(d) The section commander will check:-
(i) Causalities,
(ii) Ammunition expenditure, and
(iii) Refilling of LMG magazine.
(e) The section commander will await the platoon commander for further orders.
SECTION-11
FIRE CONTROL ORDERS
Ques 1 - What are the important terms used in Fire control orders?
Ans - (a) Fire Unit. Any number of men firing under the command of one man, usually, a section. The person responsible for giving
the executive order of fire, is the fire unit commander.
(b) Fire Direction Orders. These are the orders which the fire unit commander receives from his superior, telling him when, at what
target and with what intensity to open fire. A section commander will receive fire direction orders from his platoon commander. They
include special directions about opening and withholding fire.
(c) Fire Control Orders. These are orders given by the fire unit commander to direct and control the fire of the section. Emphasis
should be on control and supervision.These orders are the final with complete instructions after all factors have been considered and
before fire is actually opened.
(d) Arc of Fire. This denotes the area of ground for which the fire unit is responsible and with in which it will engage targets. An arc of
fire, must not be confused with field of fire which is the area upon which it will be possible to fire effectively in any direction.
Ques 2. What are the important points which section commander must remember before giving fire control orders?
Ans - (a) Indication. No fire control order can be effective unless the target is clearly indicated and can be easily recognized by the
men of the fire unit.
(b) Range Visibility and Vulnerability. It should be considered if the range, visibility and vulnerability of the target justify fire at
all. Would it be better to wait and get a more vulnerable or more complete surprise?
(c) Best Weapon to Use . What is the best weapon to use, although the LMG is the main weapon of the section, the target may be
more suitable for the fire of the riflemen only or for a combination of both weapons.
(d) Single Round or Burst. Should the fire be in single rounds or in burst. Should it be rapid or at the normal rate? Rapid rate is
justified only on a comparatively few occasions when it allows the maximum effect to be gained from surprise when an especially
vulnerable target presents itself or to cover move in the final phase of an assault.
Ques 3. What are the important rules for giving out fire control orders?
Ans - (a) The orders should be given clearly, calmly and consciously.
(b) It should be given loudly, so as to be heard over the noise of battle but should not be louder than required.
(c) It must be given as an order, and obeyed as such.
(d) It must be given with adequate pauses, so that those being addressed may have time to take the correct action, for example, there
must be time for sight adjustment after the range is ordered. No 1 Section (Pause) 300 (Pause) fire when you see a target.
Ques 4. What is the sequence of fire order?
Ans - The suggested code work is 'GRIT' each letter of which signifies stage in fire orders as follows:-
G -The Group of the section which is addressed, that is the LMG group or the whole section. An order starting with 'No 1
Section'• indicates that the whole of No. 1 Section will fire. 'LMG-Group or Rifles Group'• means that the group named only will fire.
R -The Range to the target. To ensure accuracy of fire and to concentrate attention on a limited area of ground.
I - The Indication of the point of aim by its description.
T -The type of fire to be employed.
SECTION-12
TYPES AND CONDUCT OF PATROLS
(ONLY FOR SD CADETS)
Ques 1. What are the essential qualities in fighting men developed by patrolling?
Ans - Patrolling develops four essential qualities of the fighting man:-
(a) Discipline
(b) Comradeship
(c) Aggressiveness.
(d) Alertness.
Ques 2. What are the type of patrols?
Ans - (a) Reconnaissance Patrols (Recce Patrols)
(b) Protective Patrols.
Ques 3. What are the tasks of Recce of patrols?
Ans - (a) Location and details of enemy position.
(b) Location of obstacles laid by enemy and constant plotting of features.
(c) Study enemy habits.
(d) Any other specific information asked.
Ques 4. What are the tasks of Protective patrols?
Ans (a) To deny approaches to enemy patrols and obtain earliest possible information of the approach of the enemy.
(b) To gain and confirm topographical information including that of artificial obstacles.
(c) To give early warning of the enemy's intentions.
(a) To deny information to enemy patrols.
(b) To dominate 'No Man's Land'.
(c) To protect flanks by aggressive patrolling.
Ques 5. What are the important points to be remembered by scouts?
Ans - (a) Scouts should move from cover to cover using the correct methods of observation around cover.
(b) Scouts should move by short bound in area where enemy is suspected.
(c) A pair of scouts should move one behind another and should keep each other within easy voice control .The leading scout should
often look over his shoulder to ensure that he has the second scout in visual contact. However, it is for the second scout to keep up.
(d) Scouts must always be alert.
(e) Scouts must protect each other by placing themselves in such a way that they can cover each other by fire.
(f) Scouts move as individuals making use of ground and cover.
(d) Scouts must always remain in contact with the unit through the sub-units commander.
(e) Communication are from front to rear. Contact is visual.
(j) Scouts must so move on ground and take cover in such a way that they do not give away each others position.
(k) Scouts must not bunch together on bounds.
Military History
SECTION-1
BIOGRAPHY OF INDIAN HISTORICAL LEADERS
BIOGRAPHY OF CHHATAR PATI SHIVAJI
Early Years
1. On 10th April 1627 Shivaji was born at Shivneri, some 50 miles, North East of Pune. At that time his father , Shahji
Bhonsle was being pursued by his father–in–law Lukhuji Jadhav with the borrowed might of the Mughals. Leaving his pregnant
wife Jijabai at Shivneri fort, Shaji was eluding his pursuers. Jijabai‟s loyalty was to Shahji and she was naturally very disturbed by the
fact that it was her own father who was in hot pursuit of her husband. Jijabai vowed that if she were blessed with a son, she
would name him after the God. Thus when the son arrived, he was named Shivaji.
2. When Shahji was exiled from Maharashtra, he left his wife Jijabai and Shivaji in the care of a shrewd and able
Brahmin, Dadaji Kondadev whom he had appointed Administrator of his Pune jagir. Dadaji Kondadev took particular care in the up
bringing
of his illustrious ward. He initiated Shivaji in to the art of administration and ingrained in him a love for his country.
From his mother young Shivaji imbibed a deep religious spirit. An inner urge kept taking him to the remote countryside which in those
days was extensively covered with jungles. Mavles (locals) were pleased to see their Sirdar‟s son visiting them so often despite hazards
and hardships of movement in that difficult terrain.
3. Shivaji did not relish the idea of service under his father‟s overlord, the Sultan of Bijapur. He wanted to become an
independent and sovereign ruler so that he could protect his people from the depredations of the Muslim rulers. The legitimate
aspiration of the son of a Hindu Chieftain was supposed to be advancement in service under a muslim overlord, but Shivaji was cast in
a different mould and nursed ambitions of attaining “Hindu Swaraj”.
4. By 1645 when he was only 18 years old, Shivaji gathered a band of one thousand Mavles. He took possession of
Fort of Rohida near Pune. The Deshpande of Rohida was asked by the Sultan to explain why he had allowed this act of indiscipline. On
his referring this enquiry to Shivaji, the latter wrote to him on 17 April 1645, “We are not disloyal to the Shah. The God whose abode is
on the hills of your valley has given us the inspiration and He will fulfill the wishes of all of us to establish our own Raj. It is God‟s wish
that we establish our own rule and be independent”. This shows that Shivaji had already begun to harbour thoughts of independence.
5. Shivaji‟s small beginning at territorial expansion received a setback as Sultan Adil Shah imprisoned Shahji for
alleged disloyalty and rebellious activity of his son Shivaji. Adil Shah tried to secure Bangalore, Kondana from
Shahji‟s son, however his
armies were defeated by Shambhaji and Shivaji. This was first major success in battle for Shivaji. Shahji was
later released from jail and invested with a robe of honour.
6. Shivaji attended to his army‟s organisation and training. Troops were trained to march long distances and to
scale perpendicular heights with the help of gharpeo (Lizzards). Shivaji defeated Chandra Rao in a clever move
and captured Javli on 15 Jan 1656 and brought surrounding areas under his control. Shivaji renamed the
stupendous hill fort of Riari as Raigad and it became his capital later. In Sep 1656 Shivaji paid a friendly visit to
his uncle Shambhaji, who was not administering the Pargana of Supe in satisfactory manner and took him
prisoner. The whole of Pune District was now under Shivaji‟s rule.
7. His early clash with two powerful adversaries was epitomized by two dramatic personal encounters with the
Commanders-in-Chief of the enemy‟s forces Afzal Khan in 1659 and Shaista Khan in 1663. In both encounters,
he came out successful. This helped him in establishing a charismatic control over his people. In Nov 1656
Sultan of Bijapur died and this gave Shivaji an opportunity to raid Bijapur territory. He took over Dabhol and his
forces crossed the Bhima River and plundered Mughal territory in Ahmednagar District. In the later half of 1657
Shivaji entered Konkan, by middle of 1658 Shivaji secured whole of North Central Konkan, Kalian, Bhivandi,
Mahuli and forty forts were captured.
Encounter with Afzal Khan
8. Famous General of Bijapur Army Afzal Khan was sent on strong punitive expedition to bring Shivaji to book.
However, Shivaji realising that his adversary was too powerful agreed to one to one meeting, with Afzal Khan
who was notorious for treachery and cruelty. Afzal Khan arrived first at the pavilion erected for the meeting
at Pratapgad. Shivaji soon followed him arriving seemingly unarmed. The Khan embraced Shivaji and held his
neck with his strong arms. Shivaji being much shorter barely came up to his shoulder. Having got Shivaji in a
stranglehold, the Khan drew his dagger and hit his side. This blow turned out to be harmless. Shivaji‟s body
armour protected him. The wiry Maratha retaliated by tearing open the Khan‟s bowels with his steel tiger
claws he has hidden in his left sleeve and with his right hand he stuck into Afzal Khan‟s side. The Khan fell down
shouting, “ Treachery, Murder, Help”. The attendants rushed from both sides. One Sayyid Banda attacked Shivaji
with his long sword and cut his turbun making a deep dent on the steel beneath. One of Shivaji‟s attendants
quickly came up hacked the right hand of Banda who was later killed. Shambjaji Kavji cut off Afzal‟s head and
carried it in triumph to the Fort.
9. Within a few moments the Marathas rushed upon the confused Bijapur Army. Leaderless and surprised, they
broke and fled. Supe and Shirwal were captured the same day but the remanents of Afzal Khan‟s army and his
son Fazal Khan escaped to Bijapur. Shivaji advanced 100 miles along a different route to Kolahpur and captured
the fort of Panhala on the night of 28/29 November 1659.
10. Thus ended the battle of Pratapgad. The khans army lost over 3,000 men killed and many prisoners including
certain prominent Sirdars. Among the booty captured were 65 elephants, 4000 horses, 1200 camels, 2000
bundles of clothing and rupees ten lakhs. Fazal Khan swore revenge . Hurriedly another force of 10,000 men
was concentrated under the Rustam-i-Rahman. Shivaji did the unexpected and on 28 December 1659 suddenly
attacked the Bijapuri Army, East of Kolahpur. Already demoralized at the news of Afzal Khans debacle these
soldiers could not hold ground when surprised. Shivaji‟s men fell upon this force with full fury and soon this Army
also disintegrated . This spread great alarm and consternation in Bijapur. The Sultan felt his existence
threatened. An appeal to Aurangzeb was made to send a large force to attack Pune and take possession of
Shivaji‟s dominion. Aurangzeb was looking for this opportunity and he readily responded.
Encounter with Shaista Khan
11. A combined offensive of the Mughals and Bijapur was now planned against Shivaji. The Mughal Viceroy in
the Deccan since 1659 was Aurangzeb‟s maternal uncle Shaista Khan who held the title of Amir-ul-Umrao. He
left Aurangabad on 28 January 1660 with a force of 1,00,000 men comprising 70,000 cavalary and 30,000
infantry and 4,000 elephants, 100 camels and a large number of ordanance pieces. Adil Shah of Bijapur
gathered a force of 20,000 cavalry and 1,50,000 infantry under Salabat Khan. Shivaji realised that he could not
give battle to these forces in the open. He therefore took refuge in Panhala fort on 2nd March 1660. Salabat
Khan laid siege to Panhala and this dragged on for nearly five months. Shaista Khan enterd Pune on 9th May
1660. He occupied Shivaji‟s house, the Lal Mahal. Shivaji decided to escape from Panhala. Prior to escaping, he
lulled the Bijapuris by an offer of submission. In view of this meeting, the Bijapuri Army was a little off its guard on
the previous day. Moreover, it was raining heavily on the night of 12th July. Taking advantage of this, Shivaji
escaped and reached Vishalgad with some 600 men.
12. In the North, further reverses awaited Shivaji, Shaista Khan advanced from Pune to the strategic fort of
Chakan. He captured this fort on 15th August 1660 despite the stout defence put up by the garrison. Shivaji
spent the next few months quietly at Raigad maturing his plans. Shaista Khan turned his attention to Kalian
District and North Konkan. He dispatched Kartalab Khan to advance into North Konkan. Shivaji had got scent of
this move and with lighting speed had come up with his Army to lay an ambush near Umbre. The Mughals could
not manoeuvre and there was complete confusion in their ranks with the Marathas showering arrows from all
sides. Kartalab sent an emissary to Shivaji and agreed to surrender all his arms and equipment provided he and
his men were allowed to return to Pune.
13. Shivaji now proceeded South towards Rajapur some 100 miles from Umbre. The townsmen surrendered to
Shivaji and gave him traditional gifts. Shivaji spent the next two years consolidating his rule over the Konkan and
keeping the large Mughal Army around Pune at bay. This was the best he could do under the circumstances as
he could not match the strength of the Mughals and evict them from his territory . The Mughals on their part
chose to co-exist with Shivaji and did not attempt to cross the Sahyadri Range in to the Konkan after the battle of
Umbre.
14. Shaista Khan had been in occupation of the Pune region for nearly three years and his large army was living
off the land. Shivaji could not face Shaista Khan‟s large army in battle. He therefore conceived a very bold and
audacious plan to raid Shaista Khan in his palace and kill him. Shaista Khan was living in Lal Mahal with a large
guard around the palace. A little down the road from Lal Mahal towards Singhgarh was a contingent of 10,000
men. It was therefore a very difficult task to raid Shaista Khan in his palace. Shivaji handpicked 400 of his trusted
followers for this raid. On the night of 5 April 1663 which was the sixth day of Ramzan, the month of fasting,
Shivaji choose to strike.
Shivaji with his band gained entrance into the camp, Marathas pretended to be a marriage procession with
Shivaji acting as the bride groom. Hacking his way Shivaji entered Shaista Khan‟s bedroom. He stuck the Khan
with sword. Shivaji thought he had killed Shaista Khan but in actual fact that the Khan lost only three fingers of
his right hand and managed to escape from the room.
15. The raid having been accomplished, Shivaji got his men together and promptly withdrew along the main
route. In this raid the Mughals lost 43 killed including one son and one son-in-law of Shaista Khan who himself
had been wounded. These losses were negligible but the loss of prestige was tremendous. When Aurangzeb
heard of this, he immediately removed Shaista Khan from the Deccan to Bengal and sent Prince Muazzam as
the next Mughal Viceroy of the Deccan.
16. While the change of Viceroys was going on at Aurangabad, Shivaji raided Surat, the richest port of the West
Coast. Governer of Surat fled from the city into the fort. The plunder of Surat yielded cash and valuables worth
over one crore of rupees. The city was ransacked for four days from 6th to 10th January 1664. This was
Shivaji‟s retaliation against the Mughals for desolating his territory for three years.
To Agra and Back
17. Aurangzeb decided to throw the full might of the Mughal Empire against the “mountain rat”. The emperor
appointed his ace general, Mirza Raja Jai Singh to put down Shivaji. In January 1665 Shivaji returned to Raigad
where he received the news of Jai Singh‟s expedition. Shivaji realized that Jai Singh would take some time to
reach Deccan. He decided to utilize this time to carry out a naval expedition to Basrur, a rich coastal town and
collect tribute. He accordingly embarked with 6000 troops in 3 large and 85 small ships. He moved some 180
miles by sea and appeared before Basrur. The rich merchants of the town gave him a handsome tribute. He then
returned to his capital in March 1665.
18. Jai Singh advanced with speed and on 3rd March 1665, he entered Pune. He started sending troops to
capture important centers of communication and to plan capture of Shivaji‟s forts. The first fort chosen for
capture was Purandhar. The siege of Purandhar commenced on 1st April 1665 and by the end of May 1665 the
siege lines had come closer to the outer wall of the fort. Realising that further resistance at Purandhar was futile,
he sued for terms and sought an interview with Jai Singh. This meeting was arranged and a treaty concluded
whereby Shivaji was to surrender 23 of his forts and surrounding area yielding an annual revenue of 4 Lakh huns
to the Mughals. 12 forts with an annual revenue of 1 lakh huns were to be retained by Shivaji on condition
of service and loyalty to imperial throne.
19. The terms of Purandhar Treaty were confirmed by the emperor. A royal firman was issued to Shivaji and he
was given robes of honour. Jai Singh now set out for an invasion of Bijapur and Shivaji agreed to accompany
him with a contingent of 9000 men. Shivaji led the advance and the Bijapur forts enroute were either evacuated
in terror or they surrendered. It is interesting to note that in this campaign Shivaji fought alongside the Mughals .
However. Jai Singh was concered about the loyalty of Shivaji . He there fore, persuaded Shivaji to visit the
Emperor at Agra. Although Shivaji agreed to go to
Agra, he fully realized the danger he was facing.
20. On his reaching Agra, the Emperor appears to have decided to either kill Shivaji or confine him in a fortress.
A large force was placed around Shivajis camp and he was made a prisoner. Shivaji feigned illness and began to
send out several huge baskets of sweetmeats for distribution to Brahamins as an act of religious piety. Shivaji
and Shambhuji got into two baskets and on 19th August 1665 went out along with several other baskets of
sweet-meats.
21. On escaping from Agra, Shivaji first proceeded to Mathura which is in opposite direction. He shaved off his
moustaches and beard and smeared ashes on his body. On 12 September he reached Raigad having covered
about 1000 miles in 25 days riding approximately 40 miles a day. There was great jubiliation throughout
Maharashtra at the miraculous escape of Shivaji. Ballads were composed praising his ingenuity and superhuman
qualities. His escape from captivity caused lifelong regret to Aurangzeb. Consolidation and Coronation
22. During the period 1669, Shivaji stayed quietly at Raigad avoiding giving any provocation to the Mughals. This
period of peace was essentially a hollow truce. The year 1670 saw the renewal of conflict between the Mughals
and the Marathas. Shivaji opened his offensive in January 1670 with great vigour and immediate success.
He plundered Mughal territory and attacked several of the forts he had ceded to Aurangzeb by the Treaty of
Purandar. One after the other, forts began to fall to the Maratha and in a few months, Shivaji recovered almost all
the 23 forts he had ceded to the Mughals . Alarmed by Maratha raids, the Emperor ordered his trusted general
Diler Khan, to proceed from Nagpur to Aurangabad.
23. On 3rd October 1670 for the second time Shivaji plundered Surat. Later on he plundered the rich city of
Karanja collected cash and gold and returned to Pune with his booty loaded on 4000 bullocks and donkeys. In
1671 Shivaji captured Ahivant. On 24 November 1672 Sulatan Ali Adil Shah of Bijapur also died. Shivaji declared
war on Bijapur and recaptured Panhala Fort. In January 1674 while the Marathas were engaged with Bijapuri‟s in
Panhala region, Diler Khan tried to descend into the Konkan and create a diversion. This attempt was foiled by
Shivaji and Diler Khan had to withdraw having lost 1000 Pathans killed.
24. Having defeated both the Mughals and Bijapuris and finding both his enemies peoccupied, one with uprising
in the North-West and the other with internal squabbles, Shivaji considered this an opportune moment to
coronate himself. Coronation was a necessary formality to give him the legal and formal status of an
Independent Sovereign. Shivaji‟s coronation took place on 6th June 1674 and was one of the most fabulous
events of that time. A magnificent throne of gold and other precious gems and a richly embroidered canopy were
made for the occasion. His mother, Jijabai was alive to see her son at the height of his glory. She died a few
days after the coronation.
Karnatak Campaign and After

25. Shivaji had set his eyes on the rich Karnatak Coast for some time and was waiting for a suitable opportunity
to undertake a campaign in that theatre. Mughal camp of Padgaon was plundered in July 1674 and all tents were
burnt. The Marathas carried
away booty worth one crore rupees as also 200 fine horses. Padgaon raid was followed by other raids into the
Deccan plateau. Shivaji also wanted truce with the Mughals so that he could conduct operations on the Kanara
Coast. While negotiations were being carried out with the Mughal, Shivaji marched into the Konkan with force of
30,000. Shivaji‟s navy joined in the siege and intercepted Portgugese ships carrying rations, odder and
gunpowder to the besiged garrison. Fort fell to repeated Maratha attacks on 6th May 1675. Shivaji also captured
Karwar, Aukola and Shiveshwar and annexed the entire coast except the enclaves held by European traders. A
treaty of friendship was signed between Shivaji and Adil Shah of Bijapur whereby Krishna was recognized as
the boundary between the two kingdoms. In December 1676 a treaty of friendship was
signed with Mughals.
26. Shivaji was now ready to proceed on his long cherished campaign to the Karnatak Coast in the South. This
was to be his longest and greatest campaign. To find finance for this campaign, Shivaji chose to seek the
assistance of Abdul Hasan Qutb Shah of Golconda. Bijapuri Karnatak was to be conquered in the name of the
Sultan of Golconda and for his efforts Shivaji was to get all the spoils of war and the territory in the uplands of
Mysore. Shivaji headed for the Karnatak via Kurnool, Maratha invasion was very different. No temples were
being desecrated, nor any idols were being broken. Instead the King was halting en route at important places of
pilgrimage like Srisailam and Tirupati to worship and distribute alms to the Brahmans.
27. Jinji surrendered to Shivaji without a fight. Shivaji next proceeded to Vellore. After fourteen months of heroic
defence the garrison ultimately surrendered to the Marathas on 22 July 1678. From Vellore, Shivaji proceeded
further South to deal with Sher Khan Lodi. Sher Khan fled first to the fort of Tiruvadi and from there escaped
to another fort at Bonagiratam. The Marathas now systematically started capturing one fort after another and
ultimately on 5th July 1677 Sher Khan made terms with Shivaji giving up all his territory. In August 1677 Shivaji
captured the entire Bijapuri territory North of Cauvery covering an area of 10000 square miles. Shivaji was back
in Panhala by February 1678. He rested for some time at Panhala and in June he reached his captal, Rajgad. As
1679 drew to a close, Shivaji‟s men were also drawn into a naval battle, first with the English then with the Siddi
Janjira.
28. The events of 1679 had showed that Shivaji had become invincible on land. Even the greatest military land
power on the sub-continent had to yield before him. His superiority at sea was not so complete. Although his
forces could defy the English and force them to give up their aggressive posture against Khanderi and Underi.
Against this backdrop of events of 1679 was ushered 1680. And this was the year in which the Chhatrapati‟s
health began to falter. Worn out with constant campaigning of over thirty years, Shivaji‟s health deteriorated. On
23 March 1680 he fell seriously ill at Raigad, suffering from fever and blood dysentery. Twelve days later at noon
on Sunday the 4th April 1680, he breathed his last. Thus ended the scintillating career of this great Indian, whose
memory was to guide and inspire his countrymen for centuries to come.
Shivaji as Military Leader

29 The achievements of the neglected son of the exiled jagirdar of Pune and his rise culminating in his becoming
of Chattrapati is fascinating. A study of his life clearly brings out that he was by all standards, a great and unique
figure of Indian history. There have been few insurgent leaders in the history of mankind who can match his
genius as a guerilla captain.
30. Few military leaders have led their armies by their personal example to the same extent as Shivaji. He
enforced strict discipline and set a personal example before his men. Unlike the Mughal and other armies of that
time, he did not permit woman or ostentatious equipage to accompany his army in any campaign. He himself set
the pace in this regard. An English visitor to his camp was struck by his austere living and has left a record of
it. He noted that there were only two tents in the camps one of the King and the other of his Minister. An army
unencumbered with heavy baggage obviously achieves greater
mobility and this was a major factor contributing to Shivaji‟s success.
31. Another factor that helped Shivaji to maintain discipline in his army was the system of regular payment to
soldiers which was rigidly enforced by him. Their pay was not allowed to fall in arrears as was the practice in
other contemporary armies. No soldier, irrespective of his rank was allowed to retain any booty. It had to be
surrendered to the State. Discipline was also enforced through an efficient organization of the army with clearly
defined chains of command and making promotions on the basis of merit. The system of granting hereditary
military rank was discontinued.
32. Shivaji realised the importance of the infantry in battle. This was remarkable because in all contemporary
armies of that time infantry was no more than a “ragtag force” which used to be ill-trained and ill-equipped. They
used to be like pioneers or militia who carried loads and performed other such duties. The real fighting in battle
was the prerogative of the cavalry .Shivaji was quick to perceive the fallacy of such an approach particularly for
fighting on the hills. He trained his Mavle hillmen into an efficient and disciplined infantry. The infantry was
organized in sections of ten , each under a Naik, a Havildar commanded five sections and a Jumledar had three
Havildars under him. There was one Hazari in charge of ten Jumledars and a Panch Hazari commanded 5,000
troops. The cavalry was also similarly organized with a little variation. There were two types of soldiery in the
cavalry - the Bagirs who were provided horses and equipment by the state and Shiledars who brought their
own horses and saddlery.The latter received higher rates of pay. A Havildar commanded 25 horses, a Jumledar
five Havildar, a Subedar ten Jumledars and a Punch Hazari had ten Subedars under him. Although Shivaji‟s
army also had an artillery arm, it was not so well organized. The technique of manufacturing ordnance pieces
had not been developed and he depended more upon captured guns or getting guns from European traders
for equipping his army.
33. Shivaji had a keen eye for ground and he fully appreciated military realities. He knew that he could not match
the well equipped and large Mughal armies in the open. He, therefore generally avoided fighting pitched battles
with his enemies on the plains. He realized that his forte lay in the mobility of his army, in achieving surprise and
in fighting in mountainous terrain. He fully exploited these aspects in all his campaigns . Travelling light and
hardened by continuous training and fighting, his army could advance with lightning speed. His sudden attack of
Baji Ghorpade at Mudhol or his fleeting raids to Surat and other parts of Mughal possessions were good
examples of the mobility achieved by his army. He fully realized the value of surprise in battle . He
repeatedly succeeded in surprising his enemy. His legendary assault of Sinhgah across the Donagiri precipice or
the Maratha attack on the camp of the Mughal Viceroy at Padgaon showedhow Shivaji could achieve success by
surprising his enemy. The annihilation of Afzal Khan‟s army in the narrow Koyna Valley and the defeat of
Kartalab Khan in the Ampa Valley was achieved not only through surprise but by the masterly use of ground . It
may also be recalled that he was always prepared to stake his personal safety on the battlefield and repeatedly
faced grave risks. His decision to have a personal encounter with Afzal Khan or to personally raid the living
quarters of the Mughal Viceroy , Shaista Khan show the extent to which he was prepared to go.
34. Like all great generals, Shivaji always exploited success. Victory in battle was followed up by a vigorous
pursuit. Thus after the battle of Pratapgad where he defeated Afzal Khan‟s forces, he launched a pursuit to
Bijapur territory capturing Kolhapur. Similarly at Tiruvadi his pursuit turned the retreat of Sher Khan Lodi into a
rout.
35. Shivaji‟s strategy was based on securing a chain of forts in the hills to provide security for his operations.
From the firm base provided by these forts, he used to sally out for raids into enemy territory. When operating
against his enemy he generally adopted the strategy of indirect approach. Instead of going directly for enemy‟s
main strength, he preferred to attack where the enemy was weak. In 1671 he forced Diler khan and Badadur
Khan to withdraw from Pune on account of the success of his army against the Mughals in the North. Similarly in
1679, be relieved the pressure on Bijapur and forced Diler Khan to lift the siege by plundering Jalna and other
Mughal possessions.
36. While dealing with enemy forts, Shivaji preferred not to lay long sieges. The sieges of Phonda in 1675 or of
Vellore in 1677 lasting fourteen months were exceptions . He normally captured forts through surprise night
attacks as at Singhgarh in 1670 or Panhala in 1673. Another method often employed by him was to secure forts
through bribing the enemy fort commanders. This process started with his securing of Torna in 1646 and
continued almost throughout his career.
37. There is no doubt that Shivaji was a great military leader as he relied primarily on hit and run tactics, his fame
to military greatness rests essentially in his success as a guerilla leader. His exemplary exploits as a guerilla
captain have remained unique in the history of mankind.
MAHARANA PRATAP
Introduction
1. Maharana Pratap was born on May 9th 1540 in Kumbhalgarh, Rajasthan. His father was Maharana Udai
Singh II and his mother was Rani Jeevant Kanwar. Maharana Udai Singh II ruled the kingdom of Mewar, with his
capital at Chittor. Maharana Pratap was the eldest of twenty-five sons and hence given the title of Crown Prince.
He was destined to be the 54th ruler of Mewar, in the line of the Sisodiya Rajputs.
Ascending the Throne

2. In 1567, when Crown Prince Pratap Singh was only 27, Chittor was surrounded by the Mughal forces of
Emperor Akbar. Maharana Udai Singh II decided to leave Chittor and move his family to Gogunda, rather than
capitulate to the Mughals. The
young Pratap Singh wanted to stay backand fight the Mughals but the elders intervened and convinced him to
leave Chittor, oblivious of the fact that this move from Chittor was going to create history for all times to come.
3. In Gogunda, Maharana Udai Singh II and his nobles set up a temporary government of the kindom of Mewar.
In 1572, the Maharana passed away, leaving the way for Crown Prince Pratap Singh to become the Maharana.
However, in his later years,
the late Maharana Udai Singh II had fallen under the influence of his favorite queen, Rani Bhatiyani, and had
willed that her son Jagmal should ascend to the throne. Pratap Singh, in deference to his father's wishes,
decided to let his half-brother Jagmal become the next king. However, knowing this to be disastrous for Mewar,
the late Maharana's nobels, especially the Chundawat Rajputs, forced Jagmal to leave the throne to Pratap
Singh. Unlike Bharat, Jagmal did not willingly give up the throne. He swore revenge and left for Ajmer, to join the
armies of Akbar, where he was offered a jagir - the town of Jahazpur - in return for his help. Meanwhile, Crown
Prince Pratap Singh became Maharana Pratap Singh I, 54th ruler of Mewar - founded in 568 AD by Guhil - in the
line of the Sisodiya Rajputs.
Blockade of Mewar by Mughals
4. The year was 1572. Pratap Singh had just become the Maharana of Mewar and he had not been back in
Chittor since 1567. His old fort and his home beckoned to him. The pain of his father's death, and the fact that
his father had not been able to see Chittor again, troubled the young Maharana deeply. But he was not the only
one troubled at this time. Akbar had control of Chittor but not the kingdom of Mewar. So long as the people of
Mewar swore by their Maharana, Akbar could not realize his ambition of being the Jahanpanah of Hindustan. He
had sent several emissaries to Mewar to get Maharana Pratap to agree to sign a treaty but the latter was only
willing to sign a peace treaty whereby the sovereignty of Mewar would be intact. In the course of the year 1573,
Akbar sent six diplomatic missions to Mewar to get Maharana Pratap to agree to the former's suzerainty but
Maharana Pratap turned down each one of them. The last of these missions as headed by Raja Man Singh, the
brother-in-law of Akbar himself. Maharana Pratap, angered that his fellow Rajput was aligned with someone who
had forced the submission of all Rajputs, refused to meet Raja Man Singh. The lines were completely drawn now
- Akbar understood that Maharana Pratap would never submit and he would have to use his troops against
Mewar.
5. With the failure of efforts to negotiate a peace treaty in 1573, Akbar blockaded Mewar from the rest of the
world and alienated Mewar's traditional allies, some of whom were Maharana Pratap's own kith and kin. Akbar
then tried to turn the people of the allimportant Chittor district against their king so they would not help Pratap. He
appointed Kunwar Sagar Singh, a younger brother of Pratap, to rule the conquered territory, However, Sagar,
regretting his own treachery, soon returned from Chittor, and committed suicide with a dagger in the Mughal
Court. Sakta Singh, Pratap's younger brother now with the Mughal army, is said to have fled the Mughal court
temporarily and warned his brother of Akbar‟s actions.
Preparation for the War
6. In preparation for the inevitable war with the Mughals, Maharana Pratap altered his administration. He moved
his capital to Kumbhalgarh, where he was born. He commanded his subjects to leave for the Aravali mountains
and leave behind nothing for
the approaching enemy - the war would be fought in a mountain terrain which the Mewar army was used to but
not the Mughals'. It is a testament to the young king's respect amongst his subjects that they obeyed him and left
for the mountains. The Bhils of the Aravalis were completely behind him. The army of Mewar now raided Mughal
trade caravans going from Delhi to Surat, on their way to Europe. A section of his army guarded the all important
Haldighati Pass, the only way to get into Udaipur from the North.
7. Maharana Pratap himself undertook several penances, not because his finances forced him to do so, but
because he wished to remind himself, and all his subjects, why they were undertaking this pain - to win back
their freedom, their right to exist as they wished. He foreswore that he would eat from leaf-plates, would sleep on
the floor and would not shave. In his self-inflicted state of penury, the Maharana lived in mud-huts made from
mud and bamboo.
Battle of Haldighati
8. In 1576, the famous battle of Haldighati was fought with 20,000 Rajputs against a Mughal army of 80,000 men
commanded by Raja Man Singh. The battle was fierce though indecisive, to the Mughal army's astonishment.
Maharana Pratap's army was not defeated but Maharana Pratap was surrounded by Mughal soldiers. It is said
that at this point, his estranged brother, Sakta Singh, appeared and saved the Rana's life. Another casualty of
this war was Maharana Pratap's famous, and loyal, horse Chetak, who gave up his life trying to save his
Maharana.
Subsequent Events
9. After this war, Akbar tried several times to take over Mewar, but failed each time. Maharana Pratap himself
was keeping up his quest for taking Chittor back. However, the relentless attacks of the Mughal army had left his
army weaker, and he barely had enough money to kee it going. At this time, one of his ministers, Bhama Shah,
came and offered him all this wealth - a sum enabling Maharana Pratap to support an army of 25,000 for 12
years. It is said that before this generous gift from Bhama Shah, Maharana Pratap, anguished at the state of his
subjects, was beginning to lose his spirit in fighting Akbar. In one incident that caused him extreme pain, his
children's meal - bread made from grass - was stolen by a dog. It is said that this cut into Maharana Pratap's
heart deeply. He began to have doubts about his resolute refusal to submit to the Mughals.
10. In one of these moments of self doubt - something each and every human being goes through - Maharana
Pratap wrote to Akbar demanding "a mitigation of his hardship". Overjoyed at this indication of his valiant foe's
submission, Akbar commanded public rejoicing, and showed the letter to a literate Rajput at his Court, Prince
Prithiraj. Prithiraj was also a gallant warrior and a longtime admirer of the brave Maharana Pratap Singh. He was
astonished and grieved by Maharana Pratap's decision, and told Akbar the note was the forgery of some foe to
defame the Mewar king. "I know him well", he explained, "and he would never submit to your terms". He
requested and obtained Akbar's permission to send a letter to Pratap, ostensibly to ascertain the fact of
his submission, but really with a view to prevent it. The now-famous letter led to Pratap reversing his decision
and not submitting to the Mughals, as was his initial but reluctant intention.
Freedom of Mewar
11. After 1587, Akbar relinquished his obsessive pursuit of Maharana Pratap and took his battles into Punjab and
India's Northwest Frontier. Thus for the last ten years of his life, Maharana Pratap ruled in relative peace and
eventually freed most of Mewar, including Udaipur and Kumbhalgarh, but not Chittor. He swore his successor,
Crown Prince Amar Singh to eternal conflict against the foes of his country's independence. Maharana Pratap
was never able to win back Chittor but he never gave up fighting to win it back.
Maharana‟s Last Days.
12. In January 1597, Maharana Pratap Singh I, Mewar's greatest hero, was seriously injured in a hunting
accident. He left his body at Chavand, aged 56, on January 29, 1597. He died fighting for his nation, for his
people, and most importantly for his honour.
Maharana‟s Other Side
13. Maharana Pratap displayed great love for Arts and became a patron of the Arts. During his reign Padmavat
Charita and the poems of Dursa Ahada were written. Palaces at Ubheshwar, Kamal Nath and Chavand bear
testimony to his love of architecture. These buildings, built in the dense hilly forest have walls adorned with
military-style architecture
AKBAR THE GREAT
Introduction
1. Jalaluddin Muhammad Akbar also known as Akbar the Great (Akbar-e-Azam) October 15th , 1542-October
27th , 1605) was the son of Humayun whom he succeeded to become ruler of the Mughal Empire from 1556 till
1605. Akbar was born at Umarkot in Sind. He was brought up in the rugged country of Afghanistan rather than in
the splendor of the Persian court by his uncle Askari and his wife. Humayun had been drive into exile following
the decisive battle by the Afghan leader Sher Saha.
Early Years
2. Akbar was born at Umarkot in Sind to the Mughal Emperor Humayun and his first wife, Hamida Banu Begum
on October 15th, 1542. In 1540, Humayun had been driven into exile following decisive battles by the Afghan
leader Sher Shah. Akbar did
not go to Persia with his parents, and was raised for a time instead by his uncle Askari and his wife in the rugged
country of Afghanistan rather than in the splendor of the Persian court. He spent his youth learning to hunt, run
and fight, but he never learned to read or write, the sole exception in Babur's line. Nonetheless, Akbar matured
into a wellinformed ruler, with refined tastes in the arts, architecture and music, a love for literature, and a
breadth of vision that tolerated other opinions.
3. Following the chaos over the succession of Islam Shah (Sher Shah's son), Humayun reconquered Delhi in
1555. Only a few months later, Humayun died from an accident. Akbar succeeded his father on February 14th,
1556 and was proclaimed
"Shahanshah" (Persian for "King of Kings").
Clash with Hemu
4. Early into Akbar's career, he decided that he should eliminate the threat of Sher Shah's dynasty, and decided
to lead an army against the strongest of the three, Sikandar Shah Suri, in the Punjab. He left the city of Delhi
under the regency of Tardi Beg Khan. Sikandar Shah Suri presented no major concern for Akbar, and withdrew
from territory as Akbar approached; however, back in Delhi Hemu, a low-caste Hindu warrior, succeeded in
launching a surprise attack on the unprepared Tardi Beg Khan and appointed himself ruler.
5. Word of the capitulation of Delhi spread quickly to the new Mughal ruler, and he was advised to withdraw to
Kabul, which was relatively secure. However, Bairam Khan urged Akbar to fight the invaders and reclaim the
capital. On the march forward, he was joined by Tardi Beg and his retreating troops, who also urged him to
retreat to Kabul, but Akbar refused; later, Bairam Khan had the former regent executed for cowardice. 6. On
November 5, 1556 Akbar's Mughal army defeated the numerically superior forces of General Hemu at the
Second Battle of Panipat, fifty miles north of Delhi. The victory also left Akbar with over 1,500 War Elephants
which he promptly used to reengage Sikhander Shah at the siege of Mankot. Sikhander surrendered and was as
such spared from death, and lived the last remaining two years of his life on a large estate granted to him by
Akbar. In 1557 the only other threat to Akbars rule, Adil Shah, brother of Sikhander, died during a battle in
Bengal. Thus, by the time Akbar was 15 his rule over Hindustan was secured.
Bairam Khan
7. Akbar was only 13 years old when he became emperor, and so his general ruled on his behalf till he came of
age. The regency belonged to Bairam Khan, a Shia Turkoman noble and who successfully dealt with pretenders
to the throne and improved the discipline of the Mughal armies. He ensured power was centralised and was able
to expand the empires boundries with orders from the capital. These moves helped to consolidate Mughal power
in the newly recovered empire. 8. However, during Bairam Khan's Hajj journey, he was encoutered by an
Afghan whose father had been killed five years earlier in a battle led by Bairam. The Afgan saw a chance to reap
vengeance, and promptly stabbed Bairam, who died on January 31st, 1561. Restoration
9. While previous Muslim rulers, in particular the Mughal founder Babur, allowed freedom of worship for Hindus
and other religious groups, Akbar engaged in a policy of actively encouraging members of the varying religious
groups to enter his government. In one instance, he persuaded the Kacchwaha Rajput rulers of Amber(modern
day Jaipur) to a matrimonial alliance: The King of Amber's daughter, Hira Kunwari, became Akbar's queen. She
took the name Mariam-uz-Zamani was the mother of Prince Salim, who later became the Mughal emperor
Jahangir. Further, while other Muslim rulers had married
Hindu wives, he was the first one to allow to fully practice their religion, not just without hinderance but with
everything they needed in that regard. During his reign more Hindus than in any other Mughal ruler, or in any
previous Indian administration, were employed in the Civil Service.
10. The other Rajput kingdoms also married daughters to Akbar, until only two Rajput clans remained against
him, the Sisodiyas of Mewar and Hadas (Chauhans) of Ranthambore. Entering into an alliance with these groups
helped to secure Akbars control, as for the next 100 years Rajput soldiers served on behalf of the Mughal
empire. He went on to expand the Mughal empire to include Malwa (1562), Gujarat (1572), Bengal (1574), Kabul
(1581), Kashmir (1586), and Kandesh (1601), among others. Akbar installed a governor over each of the
conquered provinces, under his authority. 11. Akbar did not want to have his court tied too closely to the city of
Delhi. He ordered the court move to Fatehpur Sikri, near Agra, but when this site proved untenable, he set up a
roaming camp that let him keep a close eye on what was happening throughout the empire. He tried to develop
and encourage commerce. He had the land accurately surveyed for the purpose of correctly evaluating taxation;
and he gave strict commands to prevent extortion on the part of the tax gatherers.
Personality of Akbar
12. Akbar is said to have been a benevolent and wise ruler, a man of new ideas, and a sound judge of character.
As a ruler, he was able to win the love and reverence of his subjects.
13. According to Abul Fazal, his chief adviser, Akbar had a commanding personality. He was fearless in the
chase as well as in the field of battle, and, "like Alexander of Macedon, was always ready to risk his life,
regardless of political consequences". He
often plunged his horse into the full-flooded river during the rainy seasons and safely crossed over to the other
side. Though a mighty conqueror, he did not usually indulge in cruelty. He is said to be affectionate towards his
relatives. He pardoned his brother Hakim, who was a repented rebel. However, on some rare occasions, he dealt
cruelly with the offenders, as was shown by his behavior towards his maternal uncle, Muazzam, and his foster-
brother, Adam Khan. He is said to have been extremely moderate in his diet. According to records, he was fond
of fruits and had little liking for meat, which he
ceased to take altogether in his later years.
Views on Religion
14. At the time of Akbar's rule, the Mughal Empire included both Hindus and Muslims. Profound differences
separate the Islamic and Hindu faith. When Akbar commenced his rule, a majority of the subjects in the Mughal
Empire were Hindus.
However, the rulers of the empire were almost exclusively Muslim. In this highly polarized society, Akbar fostered
tolerance for all religions. He not only appointed Hindus to high posts, but also tried to remove all distinctions
between the Muslims and non-Muslims. He abolished the pilgrim tax in the eighth year and the jizya in the
ninth year of his reign, and inaugurated a policy of universal toleration. He also enjoyed a good relationship with
the Catholic Church, who routinely sent Jesuit priests to debate.
15. Akbar built a building called Ibadat Khana (House of Worship), where he encouraged religious debate. Akbar
encouraged Hindus, Catholics and even atheists to participate. He tried to reconcile the differences of both
religions by creating a new faith
called the Din-i-Ilahi ("Faith of the Divine"), which incorporated both versions of Islamic Sufism and 'bhakti' or
devotional cults of Hinduism. Even some elements of Christianity - like crosses, Zorosastrianism- fire worship
and Jainism were amalgamated
into the new religion.
Patron of the Art and Literature
16. Although Akbar was illiterate, he had a fine literary taste. He took interest in philosophy, theology, history,
and politics. He maintained a library full of books on various subjects, and was fond of the society of scholars,
poets and philosophers, who
read books to him aloud, and thus esabled him to be conversant with Sufi, Christian, Zoroastrian, Hindu and Jain
literature. He used to invite scholars from different religions for discussions with him.
17. Akbar also possessed a fair taste of art, architecture and mechanical works. Many pieces, including the
magnificent Hamzanama, was produced under Akbar. Akbar is also credited with many inventions and
improvements in the manufacture of matchlocks. He erected a vast administrative machinery on a
comprehensive plan.
Navratnas
18 As with many Indian rulers Akbar's court had Navaratnas ("Nine Jewels"), a term denoting the group of nine
extraordinary people. Akbar's Navratnas were:
Abul-Fazel - Akbars's chief advisor and author of Akbarnama, Akbar's biography
Faizi
Mian Tansen - known for his voice and music
Birbal - known for great wit
Raja Todar Mal
Raja Man Singh
Abdul Rahim Khan-I-Khana
Fakir Aziao-Din
Mullah Do Piaza
Final Years
19. The last few years of Akbar's reign were troubled by the misconduct of his sons. Two of them died in their
youth, the victims of intemperance. The third, Salim, later known as Emperor Jahangir, was frequently in
rebellion against his father. Asirgarh, afort in the Deccan, proved to be the last conquest of Akbar, taken in 1599
as he proceeded north to face his son's rebellion. Reportedly, Akbar keenly felt these calamities, and they may
even have affected his health and hastened his death, which occurred in Agra. His body was interned in a
magnificent mausoleum at Sikandra, near Agra.
SECTION-2
FAMOUS BATTLES /WARS OF INDIA
INDO PAK WAR 1971
EASTERN SECTOR
Introduction
1. 1971 war was thrust upon us by an arrogant and aggressive neighbour who bullied, terrorised, and bled it‟s
own constituent partner in the East to the extent that ten million refugees fled to India resulting in a situation that
was unsustainable to India politically, economically and militarily .
2. When repeated attempts to find a reasonable solution with Pakistan failed, India sought the assistance of the
international community to help Pakistan to come to it‟s senses. Unfortunately the world was indifferent and
Pakistan‟s brutal atrocities against it‟s own citizen continued unchecked . Instead, it was able to drum up support
from China and the USA. The rest of the World looked the other way stating that this was an internal matter of
Pakistan.
3. For India however, it was an outrage against humanity and also a matter of it‟s own survival. The influx of 10
million refugees with the attendant problems of housing, food, water, medical care, hygiene and sanitation
imposed an unsustainable burden on her people. It also had-dangerous security and law and order implications.
4. India stood alone in it‟s predicament against the studied indifference of an essentially partisan world and the
malevolent machinations of an insolent and highhanded neighbour. Immense pressure by an agitated public
began to build-up demanding immediate action against Pakistan-but the time was not ripe. There were factors
against early intervention-political, military and climatic that demanded a self- imposed delay.
5. A proper appreciation was carried out that took into account the state of arms and ammunition, equipment,
training, commerce and industry, road and rail communication, world opinion, climate, weather, morale, enemy
options and likely course of action. All this indicated a particular time-table for war that would be favourable to
India. Indian leaders held their hand and adhered to this time-frame and used the intervening period to gear up
for the expected Pakistani offensive. When it did come on the 3rd of Dec 1971, the nation was well prepared.
Origin of the Conflict
6. Ever since the creation of Pakistan, political power had always been wielded by West Pakistan and most of
the resources of the entire country had been used for the benefit of West Pakistan.
7. In the elections held on 07 Dec 1970, the Awami Leage led by Sheikh Mujibur – Rahman won against Bhutto‟s
People‟s Party and it thus emerged as the majority party. Bhutto had no intention to see political power slipping
from his hands and threatened to plunge Pakistan into a civil war if Mujib was allowed to form the government.
Yahya Khan the President of Pakistan also did not relish the idea of power being transferred to East Pakistan,
and readily fell in with Bhutto‟s wishes and postponed the Assembly session. When this happened, East
Pakistanis who had all along been treated as inferior citizens of the State felt cheated.
8. The infuriated Bengalis rallied round Mujib and the functioning of the government in the Eastern province
came to a halt. All government and semigovernment offices, central and provincial, were closed, students and
agitated crowds took the law into their own hands and indulged in open plunder of non-Bengali property and
killing of non-Bengalis.
9. This in fact was an outburst of the simmering discontent that prevailed in the Eastern Wing of Pakistan. Except
for religion, there was nothing common between the two wings. The West had exploited the Eastern wing‟s
economic resources for the benefit of the Western wing. The West took 70% of foreign aid the country received
and 70% of it‟s imports, and monopolized 85% and 90% of all posts in the bureaucracy and the army
respectively. No attention was paid to protecting and improving living conditions of disaster prone East Pakistan.
10. By 03 Mar 1971, Mujib‟s writ ran wide in East Pakistan. Curfew had been imposed in Dacca on 02 Mar 1971.
Troops moved into the city and resorted to firing, causing casualities. Mujib at a big rally asked the army to go
back to barracks. Lt Gen Sahabzada Yakub Khan the Governor General and Marshal Law Administrator,
withdrew the troops. This was hailed as a victory for Mujib. At a huge rally Mujib made his four demands. These
were:-
(a) Withdrawal of martial law.

(b) Return of troops to barracks.
(c) Enquiry into army killings.
(d) Transfer of power to duly elected representatives of the people.
11. It seemed that Mujib and his associates had already become the rulers of East Pakistan. Pakistan however
did not take it lying down. Yakub Khan was recalled and replaced by Lt Gen Tikka Khan who was later to
become notorious as the “Butcher of Bangla Desh”.
12. Yahya Khan did not accept Mujib‟s four demands, and the civil disobedience movement had turned the
situation out of control. Negotiations between Yahya Khan and Mujib dragged on but led nowhere. It appeared
that these were delaying tactics to permit the induction of additional troops for the final crackdown.
13. Negotiations between Yahya Khan and Mujib dragged on, but led nowhere. It appeared that these were
delaying tactics to permit the induction of additional troops for the final crack-down.
14. On 25 March Tikka Khan launched Òperation Blitz‟ against the resistance. Tikka Khan did not hesitate to
use artillery and machine guns against unarmed civilians Operation blitz resulted in a mass exodus of terrified
civilians pouring into India which finally totalled to more than 10 million refugees that became India‟s
responsibility.. 15. Five East Pakistan Rifle (EPR) battalions revolted and they organized the Mujahids, the
Ansars, the police and ex-sevicemen to resist West Pakistan army rule. Overall coordination however was
lacking. EPR detachments concentrated on attacking Pakistani border outposts and surrounding isolated
garrisons. Tikka Khan got two more divisions flown in via Sri lanka..
The Indian Response
16. The exodus of terrified refugees to India however continued unabated. The burden of refugee relief was
estimated at about half of India‟s defence budget. Besides this intolerable economic burden, it created grave
security problems. These consequences-economic, political, and military were unsustainable for India.
17. Boarder incidents multiplied and Pakistani troops made forays into Indian territory against Mukti Bahini forces
who had their bases in India. As these clashes grew in number and intensity, our boarder posts had to be
reinforced by the army. This brought Pakistani and Indian Army units in direct confrontation with each other. By
end Oct 1971 these boarder clashes became more violent. Both sides strengthened their positions on the
borders in the East.
18. India decided to call upon the world powers to persuade Pakistan to come to terms with Mujib and install the
legitimate government in Dacca so that the refugees could go back. The USA however maintained that the issue
was an internal matter of Pakistan & instead counseled restraint. President Yahya Khan became more arrogant
& declared “War with India is very near, and in case of war, Pakistan will not be alone”. He was banking on
support from the USA, China and the Muslim Middle-East countries. India signed a treaty of Peace, Friendship
and Cooperation with the USSR in August 1971.
19. On 23 Oct 1971, Prime Minister Indira Gandhi in a last minute attempt to avert war proceeded to France,
West Gemany, Belgium, the UK, the USA and Australia. She pointed out to them the genocide being carried out
by Pakistan in it‟s Eastern constituent, the unbearable burden that the refugees had imposed on India and urged
them to advise President Yahya Khan to settle with Mujib. This they could not, or would not do. Meanwhile
pressure by the opposition, the public and the press was building up for immediate military action against
Pakistan.
Reservation by the Army Chief
20. Gen Manekshaw has his own reservations about early action. He was against halfbaked, inconclusive
involvement and had the moral courage to withstand pressures that went against his convictions. His reasons
were :-
(a) A reorientation of operation plans needed to be carried out along with necessary administrative infrastructure
and backing.
(b) The quantum of force needed for this operation would take time to collect and by the time this was done, the
monsoon would be imminent and that left an impossibly tight schedule for the operations.
(c) There was a shortage of reserves of armoured and specialized vehicles and of bridging equipment.
(d) Climate and weather imposed their own restrictions. Adequate time was not available to complete operations
before onset of the monsoons. It was desirable to time our operations in such a manner that China would not be
able to help Pakistan even if wanted to. This was only possible after the snow had set in and the passes in the
Himalayan border regions would then be closed.
21. General Manekshaw felt that December would be the best for launching of an offensive by either country.
Options Open to India
22. By March 71 it had become apparent that war with Pakistan was a distinct possibility. The first major
consideration was choosing the time of the offensive-should such a choice be available. One choice was to
launch an offensive straight away and relieve the misery of million of East Pakistanis, or to launch the offensive
after the monsoon. The former option had the advantage of putting an end to the suffering of the citizens of East
Pakistan-but the big disadvantage was that we might be caught by the monsoons and get caught and bogged
down in the riverine delta region of East Pakistan without being able to achieve our objectives. Also, in summer,
the mountain passes leading from Tibet into India were open and that would permit Chinese intervention.
It would also permit easy infiltration from POK into the higher reaches of Kashmir.
23. Gen Manekshaw felt that the Indian army was not quite ready and that there were much better chances of
success if we could wait till December both from the point of view of better preparedness and also because
speedier operations were possible in December well after the monsoons.
24. Other than the consideration of time , the following options were open to India :-
(a) To attack on both fronts simultaneously.

(b) To carry out a holding attack in the West and to attack in the East.
(c) To encourage and assist the Mukti Bahini in East Bengal in their guerilla
warfare against West Pakistan, thus slowly drawing more and more Pakistani troops to that region, and then to
hold in the East and carry out the main offensive in the West.
25. The aim of the government was to create conditions by political pressure and persuasion if possible for the
installation of the legitimate government in East Pakistan and for the 10 million refugees to return home.
Considering the above it was therefore decided to hold in the West and to carry out the main offensive in the
East.
The Mukti Bahini
26. By the end of Apr 1971, most of the revolting Bengali troops had been flushed out into India. For all practical
purpose the insurgency that started on 26 Mar had virtually died and something was needed to be done to bring
it back to life again.
27. Causes of Failure of the Insurgency. Although the rebellion and consequent insurgency by the East Pakistani
military elements of the Pakistani army started well, the revolt did not achieve results. The failure of the
insurgency could be attributed to the following causes :-
(a) The revolt was not properly planned. There was total lack of coordination in the rebel‟s operations.
(b) The intensity of Operation Blitz demoralized the Mukti Bahini.
(c) The rebels instead of going in for guerilla warfare, chose to fight pitched battles. In consequence they
suffered heavy casualties.
(d) Operations were conducted by comparatively junior officers who failed to plan systematically for long term
results.
(e) Shortage of junior leaders especially in JCO and NCO ranks.
(f) Failure of the organizers to draw up and implement an integrated plan laying down aims, objectives and
proper priorities.
(g) No effort was made to establish a countrywide and regional system of command and control by nominating
leaders and defining areas of responsibility.
(h) No link had been established between the military elements and clandestine militant organizations raised by
various political parties during the
period of political uncertainty. As a result the revolt lacked a strong political base. It had no organized
infrastructure to sustain a prolonged insurgency.
28. Organising the Mukti Bahini. Two types of support were thought of at this stage by the Indian Government:-
(a) A limited supply of arms together with facilities for training in guerilla warfare.
(b) Diplomatic Support. Although the Indian Government had not yet recognized the provisional government of
Bangladesh, this government was
functioning from Mujib Nagar near Calcutta.
29. On 14 Apr, the provisional government of Bangladesh appointed Col Osmani Commander-in-Chief of it‟s
armed forces. On 30 Apr the Indian Army was asked to take over the guidance of all aspects of guerilla warfare
for the Mukti Bahini.
30. Preparation for War. Important issues that were attended to by the Army Chief in preparation for an Offensive
by Pakistan:-
(a) Reserve holdings of stockpiles of equipment and ammunition.

(b) Making units and formations fit for war.
(c) Rationalisation of Equipment.
(d) Rationalisation of location of ammunition and equipment.
(e) Critical shortages in unit holdings.
(f) Unit turnovers.
(g) Manpower hortage.
(h) Leave.
(j) Courses.
(k) Command of Units.
(l) TA Units.
(m) Road communication.
(n) Communication facilities.
(o) Telegraph.
(p) Mobilisation Schemes.
(q) Movement of strike corps.
31. Operations in Support of the Mukti Bahini. In view of the training being given to the Mukti Bahini and Indian
support to Bangladeshi guerillas, Niazi strengthened his border defences at the expense of his depth areas and
his reserves.
32. Niazi apparently did not anticipate a major attack from India and felt that Indian efforts would be confined to
capturing a large chunk of territory adjacent to it‟s own base for establishing a Bangladesh government. Niazi
therefore surrendered depth for strength of forward defence. He tried to seal the border by establishing a large
number of BOP. Troops meant for depth defences of Dacca, and reserves were strung out on border posts. This
was a fatal mistake made by him but eminently suitable to our plans.
33. Mukti Bahini activities against these border outpost increased and Niazi reacted to them violently. He kept
telling his troops that not an inch of territory would be allowed to be lost. Gradually the whole border became
alive against the nibbling attacks by the Mukti Bahini. By the middle of November Pakistani troops were
provoked to such an extent that they began crossing into India.
34. The Mukti Bahini operated inside Pakistan territory supported by Indian artillery deployed on our side of the
border. The biggest action was fought at Bayra in the Jessore Sector North East of Calcutta. Indian troops
pursued Pakistani intruders across the border. A fierce battle took place near the village of Garibpur about 5 Km
inside Pakistan territory in which Pakistan lost 13 Chaffee tanks and three saber-jets against Indian troops loss of
6 tanks.
35. Crossing over of Pakistani troops into India gave licence to Indian troops to likewise cross over into East
Pakistan. Pakistan BOPs and strong points were captured all along the border. Whenever the Indian troops
attacked fortified positions the Pakistani troops fought back. It was increasingly realized that for speedy victory,
by-passing of fortified positions was imperative.
36. Mukti Bahini operations helped the Indian army which got to know the Pakistani pattern of fighting. It also
helped in the following ways:-
(a) In some instances the initial ingress helped to cross start lines well ahead of the opening of hostilities.
(b) By passing the Pakistani defensive positions completely threw Niazi‟s forward posture off balance, and he
was never able to recover from it.
37. Yahya Khan opted for all out war against India . On 03 Dec 1971 Pakistani aircraft attacked Indian airfields at
Srinagar, Pathankot, Amritsar, Halwara, Ambala, Sirsa, Faridkot, Jamnagar, Jodhpur and Agra.
The Battle for Dacca
38. From 03 Dec 1971, when Yahya Khan formally declared war on India by attacking our airfields in the
Western Sector , the situation in East Pakistan was already getting out of control. By 07 Dec 1971, the Indian
Army was well beyond it‟s planned start lines and in some Sectors nearly half way towards it‟s objectives. In the
North Western Sector Pirganj was captured and Bogra was being threatened. In the South Western Sector
Jessore and Jhenida had been captured. In the Central Sector Indian Troops had reached the line of the local
Brahmaputra river. In the Eastern Sector, a heliborne operation had been mounted on Sylhet, Ashuganj was
being threatened and Mudaffarganj had been captured. Thereafter the situation deteriorated badly in all
sectors with the Indian army moving with great speed and determination towards it‟s given objectives. The Army
Chief had been repeatedly calling upon Pakistani forces to surrender. The Governor of East Pakistan had been
sending messages to Yahya Khan asking for a Cease-Fire and a political settlement but nothing happened.
Yahya kept assuring Niazi that the Chinese and the USA would intervene on their behalf. Although nothing
happened in the North as far as the Chinese were concerned, on 13 Dec information was received that a Task
Force of the United States Seventh fleet had entered the Bay of Bengal. On 14 Dec, information was received
that the Governer was going to hold an important meeting. Indian Air Force attacked Government House the
same day and rocketed the roof of the building. The Governor resigned and went over to the International Red
Cross.
39. On the military side, the Pakistanis had got into a panic, Maj Gen Jamshed who was responsible for the
security of Dacca was ordered to speedly organize the defence of Dacca Bowl, the reason for this was that no
order had been given and no action taken to organise a planned and systematic withdrawal. Thus when the crisis
developed all the divisional commanders were either out of touch or refused to send any troops back for fear of
being intercepted and destroyed. Even Inf Bde which had been tasked with the defence of Dacca had broken up
and only remnants were falling back. Pak tried to organize some semblance of a defence of Dacca by mustering
soldiers belonging to different arms and services and rear parties in Dacca with all sorts of weapons from
the Ordnance Depot. It was however a hastily organized affair and lacked cohesion, and leadership. The morale
of it‟s troops was at it‟s lowest ebb. Indian Forces by this time were on on the outskirts of Dacca in all sectors.
40. Early in the morning of 16 Dec, a message was intercepted from Niazi to his commanders asking them to
cease fire. Gen Nagra exploited the situation by sending a message to Niazi asking him to surrender. It was
learnt that Yahya had instructed Niazi to obtain a ceasefire and Niazi in turn had approached the American
Consul General in Dacca to arrange the Cease Fire on Dec 15. The USA in turn approached the
Indian Government for the Cease Fire on the same day.
41. On the same day, 16 Dec 1971 General Manekshaw conveyed the Indian decision to the Pakistani High
Command that cease fire would be acceptable provided the Pakistani Army in the East surrendered to the Indian
Forces.
42. Niazi agreed to immediate Cease Fire. As decided by both sides, Indian troops entered Dacca on the
morning of 16 Dec. Messages were sent by the Pakistani command at Dacca to all it‟s formations to surrender.
At about 0430 PM General JS Aurora, GOC-in-C Eastern command took the surrender of the Pakistani Army
from Gen Niazi on the Dacca Race Course. A total of over 90,000 troops with a large amount of weapons,
ammunition and equipment surrendered to the Indian Army. The surrender brought to an end the tyranny of
Pakistan over its Bengali consitutent and liberated it finally from it‟s military shakles giving birth to a new nation-
Bangladesh. Conclusion :War in the East
43. The most remarkable aspect of this campaign is the speed with which the Indian Army brought to a
successful conclusion the campaign in East Pakistan fought across a land that was literally interspersed with a
thousand rivers.
44. The Indian Armed Forces executed in the short span of 12 days an impossible task and decimated in most
difficult terrain a formidable enemy taking 93,000 prisoners. Although the sympathy and support of the people of
the world were with the people of Bangladesh and the people of India, the governments of these countries failed
to even condemn the barbarous acts of a dehumanized Government of Pakistan.
45. Bangla Desh was liberated in 12 days, well before the American Task Force ordered by President Nixon and
headed by the nuclear powered USS Ènterprise‟ arrived in the Bay of Bengal. It however arrived too late to be of
any assistance, moral or material, to their pampered protégé. The war was over, and Bangladesh was born.
Lessons Learnt-War in the East
46. General. There are always more lessons to learn from defeat than from victory.
Victory engenders a feeling of complacency. This needs to be guarded against. The high level of leadership in
the 1971 Indo-Pak war engendered a great feeling of confidence in ourselves that encouraged certain leadership
styles and functioning. These are discussed in following paragraphs.
47. Unconventional and Unorthodox Tactics. When the Indian Army was helping the Mukti Bahini in it‟s initial
struggles against Pakistan, the army was forced to adopt unconventional and unorthodox tactics. The successes
gained, encouraged leadership at all levels to adopt the unconventional and the unorthodox.
48. Risk Taking. The need to achieve decisive results in a short time frame was necessary because of the fear of
international intervention. This prompted leaders at all levels to take calculated risks which paid off.
49. Sound Administrative Infrastructure and Sound Planning Without sound planning and a sound administrative
infrastructure success in the war in the East would not have been possible.
50. A Sound National Aim For once we had a clear national aim which is the start point of all planning of war.
51. Inter Service Cooperation Although we did not have a Chief of Defence Staff or a Combined Service
Headquarter the cooperation between the Services was of a high order.
52. Civil Military Cooperation. Cooperation between the Civil and the Military with Central and State Government
and essential services like Railways, Telegraph, Docks and ports and Transport agencies was of a high order.
This cooperation helped ensure flawless moves and communication.
53. Good Handling of the Press The press was well briefed and they behaved with a responsibility.
WAR IN THE WESTERN SECTOR

General
54. As the crisis in the East deepened , more and more Indian formations were moved there. For a long time the
Western border lay unguarded and reserves for the Northern and North Eastern borders were depleted. A
Pakistani attack at this time combined with a Chinese threat would have had very serious consequences. 55. To
ensure this, India had to be careful not to give any reason to alarm Pakistan to launch a pre-emptive offensive in
the West. For this reason , movement of troops was not permitted to the very end.
56. By the first week of November, forces in the western sector were in position and had completed their
defences sufficiently to withstand any attack. On 03 Dec 1971, Yahya Khan opened hostilities by an air-strike at
5.40PM. against our air fields at Srinagar, Pathankot, Amritsar, Halwara, Ambala, Sirsa, and Faridkot in
Western command, Jamnagar, Jodhpur and Uttarlai in Southern Command and Agra in Central Command.
Conduct of Operations
57. Till 1965, Pakistan believed that Indian reaction to any Pakistani military action in J & K which she claimed
was disputed territory would be confined to J & K itself, and would not spill over. However, in 1965, when she
mounted a divisional attack on Chhamb from Gujarat in Pakistan, India crossed the international Border and
threatened Lahore, thereby indicating that India meant what she said that “J & K was an integral part of India and
any threat to J & K was a threat to India”. Conduct is discussed in succeeding paras very broadly section wise
i.e. operation in J & K and Punjab.
58. J & K The state of J & K was divided into six sectors:-
(a) The Ladakh Sector.

(b) The Kargil Sector.
(c) The Kashmir Valley.
(d) The Rajauri Sector.
(e) The Chhamb Sector.
(f) The Jammu Sector.
59. Ladakh Sector. Partapur Headquarter had in 14 days advanced 22 kms and captured approximately 804 sq
kms. A feat possibly un-equalled in the history of warfare, considering the appalling conditions under which these
troops had to fight. 60. Kargil Sector. Kargil is a strategically important town located on the banks of the river
Shingo, a tributary of the Indus, It is located on the road connecting Srinagar to leh. To ensure security of the
road and to prevent infiltration both sides of the road are guarded by piquests on the high hills dominating the
road. During the war allPakistani posts that observed and dominated the Srinagar-Kargil-Leh road
were eliminated.
61. Kashmir Valley. Some gains were made in Lippa Valley and all along the line of control Pakistani posts were
captured.
62. Rajauri Sector. Pakistan‟s major offensive in Poonch was repulsed with heavy casualties and Indian Army
was able to capture some of enemy‟s post.
63. Chhamb Sector. Partial success was achieved by Pakistanis in Chamb Sector
64. Jammu Sector (Chicken‟s Neck Action). Chicken‟s Neck is the name given by our troops to a wedge of
Pakistan territory between the Chenab and it‟s tributary close to Akhnur. It is an area that affords a good base for
the enemy to launch attack. Indian army captured Chicken neck area by achieving total surprise. Enemy
positions were bypassed and attacked from the rear.
65. Operations in Punjab.
(a) In Sial Kot Sector, our forces had broken through the enemy network
of minefields and crossed Basantar River and were poised for further advance
when ceasefire was declared.
(b) Enemy was thrown out of Dera Baba Nanak and Shejra Bulge and we
gained territory North of Ravi. South of Ravi also positions of enemy were
over run.
66. Thus, in beating back all Pakistani offensive in the West, Western Command played an important part in the
collapse of Pakistan‟s military regime, and the Liberation of Bangladesh.
Lessons Learnt -War in the West
67. Need for Integral Armour for Plains Divisions. Use of armour „en masse‟ can be very effective. Piece meal
use should be avoided. It is imperative that plains infantry divisions have their own integrated armour.
68. Co-Location of Headquarters. It is desirable that Headquarters of Air Formations be located close to Army
Formations for closer cooperation and better results in combined operations.
69. Problems of Short Wars. Short wars give great advantage to the side which attack first. It is always with the
attacker who makes initial gains and waits for the Cease Fire to be in a better bargaining position to obtain
political and military objectives. Our nation is always at a great disadvantage in this respect. The only way to
minimise this aspect is to ensure adequate hard hitting mobile forces to quickly redress the situation and go on
the offensive.
70. Cease Fire. In all Indo-Pak wars „48‟, „65‟ and „71‟ our Government has responded to Pakistani calls for
cease-fire without properly assessing the military implications. Invariably Pakistan has gained over us in timing of
Cease Fire and invariably we have lost by agreeing too early to such requests when the situation on ground
needed a little more time to redress military imbalances.
71. Intelligence. The lack of coordination between various intelligence agencies has always been drawback in all
conflicts. This also applies to inter-Services intelligence agencies.
72. Army Air Corps. The need for integral air resources for reconnaissance, casualty evacuation, tactical
interdiction, counter air operations in tactical battlefield, direction of artillery fire, and most of all close air support
to it‟s troops is crucial. 73. Integrated Command. Need for Combined Service Headquarters and Chief
of Defence Staff is critically important. Failure to do so can only be detrimental to the nation‟s security.
74. Loss of Territory. Loss of territory in a particular sector can be accepted to achieve major gains in some other
area/sector.
75. Counter Attack. Every war has highlighted the need for quick counter attacks when objectives are lost and
the need to be prepared for a quick counter attack by the enemy when objectives in his area are captured.
76. Leadership Good leadership is a battle winning factor. India was fortunate to have good political and military
leaders. Leadership in units and formations was of a very high order.
THE KARGIL WAR

General
1. Nothing has threatened India‟s territorial integrity as seriously since 1971 as

Pak‟s ill-conceived intrusion across the Line of Control (LOC) into the Kargil District
of J&K in the summer of 1999. By infiltrating its soldier in civil clothes across the LOC
to occupy large tracts of ground on the Indian side, Pak created a new dimension to the
10 year old proxy war against India. This grave provocation resulted in a firm but
measured and restrained operation to evict the transgressors. Operation VIJAY was a
finely tuned operation by the Indian Army and IAF in synergy to regain the territory
occupied by the Pak intruders. In what was acclaimed internationally to be a very mature
and restrained action in the face of extreme provocation, the primary aim of India‟s
military action was to regain ground and conclude the military action against Pak forces
without enlarging the scope of the conflict. The last of the intruders was unceremoniously
evicted on 26 July 1999.
2. India and Pak have been in conflict with each other over J&K since 1947.
None of these conflicts have ended decisively and the 1999 conflict in Kargil was but a
continuation of the fostering problem. This time however there were some differences.
These were : Pakistan occupied a sizeable piece of Indian territory across the LOC, the
conflict took place between two democracies which are declared nuclear powers and
could have escalated out of control. To this extent it was unique.
3. The First Three Wars Pak‟s first three wars had failed to achieve its central
objective of annexing J&K. The first war was started on 20 Oct 1947 with irregulars and
tribal raiders led and supported by the Pak Army. The second war started on 06 Aug
1965 with the launching of the 6000 strong Force Gibraltar followed by a full scale
invasion spearheaded by the armoured division. The third war was fought in 1971 on
two fronts. The war on Eastern Front resulted in the liberation of East Pakistan and
creation of Bangladesh. The war on Western Front ended with limited gains.
4. The Kargil War Often termed `the Fourth War‟ Kargil war was a war with a
difference. A series of fundamental factors appear to have propelled Pak towards the
fourth war for J&K. These may be summed up as :-
(a) Continuing ideological conflict with India.
(b) Deepening a self perpetuating belief of Kashmir being the core issue and
the unfinished agenda of partition.
(c) Tension in the internal power structure of Pak.
(d) Deep desire to take revenge against India for previous defeats.
149
(e) The military aggressive ethos.
5. The Kargil conflict was different to the usual hostilities across the LOC. Earlier
each spring Pak intensified the cross border firing to facilitate infiltration, but there was
no physical occupation of Indian territory. The Kargil episode was entirely different in
that it involved the intrusion of regular Pak troops across the LOC, interspersed with
mujahideen of Pak and other foreign origin. They succeeded in occupying and fortifying
a number of critical locations on the Indian side of the LOC
REASONS OFWAR
6. Internationalisation of Kashmir. The three possible reasons underlying Pak‟s
attempt to internationalise the Kashmir issue are as under:-
(a) Internal Situation in Kashmir. After the election, Kashmir was fast
retuning to normalcy due to the Indian Governments proactive policy comprising
a four tiered strategy:-
(i) Defeat the ISI‟s design in J&K.
(ii) Better coordination between the various int agencies in the state.
(iii) Economic development.
(iv) Rehabilitation of the Kashmiri Pandits.
(b) Declining Global Support for Kashmir. Contrary to Pak‟s expectations,
major nations did not want to intervene in the Kashmir question, but expected
India and Pak to resolve it bilaterally. Thus Pak felt unless something dramatic
was done, Kashmir would become a non-issue internationally.
(c) Nuclear Capability and the Strategic Environment. Both India and
Pak became nuclear powers in 1998. Pak thought this made India‟s conventional
superiority redundant and irrelevant, if not obsolete. Thus Pak perceived it could
now take on India in Kashmir without the threat of a full scale war.
7. Pak Reasoning. The likely line of Pak reasoning for the internationalization of
the Kashmir problem are:-
(a) Kashmir had become the „Nuclear flashpoint‟ in the region. If the issue
was not resolved it could lead to nuclear war.
(b) The international community should understand the grave implications of
Kashmir on the security situation in the region and globally. Thus India must be
pressured into a just and final solution on Kashmir.
(c) There was a need for a third neutral force to monitor the LOC and why
was India not allowing the United Nations Monitoring Group for India and
Pakistan (UNMOGIP) to monitor violation of the LOC ?
150
8. Thus it appears, that the primary objective of the infiltration was to
internationalise the Kashmir problem. The second part of the strategy was linked with
the first- provoke India to retaliate so that the issue would get automatically
internationalized.
PAK ARMY PLAN FOR KARGIL INTRUSIONS
9. The essentials of this plan were to use the Pak army to occupy important heights
in the Dras-Kargil-Batalik-Turtok area and thus cut off troops in Ladakh and Siachen. By
doing so, the Indian Army would be forced to move troops out of the valley to face the
challenge, thus enabling Pak to induct a wave of foreign mercenaries into the valley to
give a fresh impetus to the flagging insurgency. This would cause the overstretched
Indian security forces to lose control and Pak would be able to internationalise the J&K
issue.
10. Pak Military Aim. To capture maximum territory here and elsewhere along
the Indo- Pak border, to isolate the state from the rest of India and be in a position of
advantage to bargain and settle issues subsequently . In doing so, it must not lose any
territory of significance to India.
11. Indian Army Assessment. India assessed the military aims of Pak as:-
(a) Cut NH 1A.
(b) Alter status of the LOC.
(c) Give a boost to military in the Valley and elsewhere in J&K.
12. Objectives. The main objectives of Pak offensive are likely to have been as
under:-
(a) Choke the strategic Srinagar-Leh road and prevent winter stocking for
troops in Ladakh.
(b) Occupy Dras and Kargil thereby opening the LOC issue.
(c) By occupying heights in Turtok and Batalik areas, choke access to Siachen
Glacier and force India to back down on the issue.
(d) Control the Mushkoh Valley near Dras and use it as a major route for
infiltration.
(e) Spread insurgency in Kargil district to ease pressure on insurgent groups
in the Kashmir Valley.
(f) Negate the Simla Agreement by altering the LOC and bring back the
Kashmir issue to international attention.
151
13. Preparations by Pak. Even through the intrusions took place in the spring
1999, it is clear that preparations had been going on for quite some time. The
operational task had been allotted to Force Commander Northern Areas (FCNA). The
troops employed were the Northern Light Infantry (NLI) suitably augmented and
supported by well trained Islamic fundamentalist mercenaries from POK and other
Islamic countries. The latter had been trained, funded and equipped by the ISI. Their
presence in the area was to deceive the international community into thinking that this
was an „indigenous freedom movement‟ and that the Pak army had no part in it.
14. The Kargil operation was approved by Gen Musharraf when he took over as
COAS in Nov 1998. During the period from Dec 1998 to Mar 1999 when the upper
reaches of Kargil District were inaccessible due to winter, preparations were made on the
Pak side of the LOC. Essentially these preparations consisted of :-
(a) Roads and mule tracks extended upto the LOC.
(b) Administrative bases were established to support the impending
intrusions.
(c) Heavy weapons and their ammunitions were stocked.
(d) Telephone cable were laid.
(e) Material for constructions of “sangars” (fortifications) was moved forward.
(f) Artillery was readjusted to be in position to support the intrusions as well
as interfere with Indian reinforcements along NH 1A. Additional artillery was
inducted from neighbouring formations.
(g) Additional helipads were constructed.
(h) Throughout the winter months the designated troops carried out training in
high altitude warfare.
(j) The Northern areas were placed under Army rule so as to facilitate optimal
use/exploitation of resources as well as deny access to the media.
15. Nature of Intrusions. The nature of intrusions are as under:-
(a) The extent of intrusions varied in depth depending on the area.
(b) Each major ridge was held by approximately 40 to 60 NLI soldiers under
an officer, supported by adequate personnel of the Scouts and some fighting
porters.
(c) Each post was equipped with support weapons like machine guns, rocket
launchers, automatic grenade launchers, mortars, anti-aircraft guns and missiles.
(d) Anti-personnel mines were laid along approaches.
(e) A degree of mutual support was ensured between adjacent posts.
152
16. Surprise and Deception. The Pak Army took the following steps to ensure
surprise and maximize deception:-
(a) Additional Troops. There was no induction of fresh troops into FCNA
for the proposed operation.
(b) Artillery. Additional artillery inducted in 1988 for trans- LOC firing was
not de-inducted.
(c) Reserve Formations. No movement of reserve formations into FCNA
until after the Indian Army‟s response.
(d) Logistics. No additional stocking was done or new bases established,
stores from existing defences were utilized. Logistic lines of communication
followed concealed routes away from Indian Army positions.
17. We need to acknowledge that the deception plan was successful and that initially
India was caught by surprise. This was perhaps also enhanced by the following:-
(a) This sector had not been the focus of any earlier attempt to disturb the
LOC.
(b) The apparent absence of militant infiltration through this sector.
(c) The high altitude and difficult terrain may have introduced complacency
on the Indian side, thinking that no viable military operations could be launched
in such terrain. Indian patrols may have become predictable and routine.
(d) The Indian Army‟s focus on internal security (IS) duties for more than 17
years had possibly caused officers and soldiers to think that Low Intensity
Conflict (LIC) was the primary threat to India and thus the logical task of the
Army. Initial responses to the intrusions were more in the nature of LIC response
rather than eviction of Pak regulars as it turned out.
The Indian Response
18. Development in Kargil Prior to Operations. The Indian deployment in
Kargil was based on one Infantry Brigade. The area was divided into four sub-sectors
and battalions spread thinly along the LOC. In early 1999 the brigade had four infantry
battalions and one BSF battalion under command.
19. There were substantial gaps between the battalions and the brigade. The brigade
received two additional battalions in summer to block routes of ingress of militants in the
Mushkoh-Dras and Batalik sub-sectors.
20. Patrolling. Regular patrolling was carried out in summers. In winter due to
heavy snow and harsh weather, patrolling was limited. In the winter of 1998- 99 there
were large gaps in period between patrols.
21. Detection of Intrusion and Immediate Reaction. On 03 May 1999 three
residents of Garkhun Village were the first to spot the intrusions in the area of Jubar
Langpa when they saw some armed men in Pathan attire digging bunkers. They informed
153
the nearest military unit. Patrols on subsequent day by various units confirmed the
intrusions.
22. On confirming the intrusions, Opertion VIJAY was launched to evict all intruders
from Indian territory, it covered all actions from 01 May 1999 onwards.
23. The Indian Government stipulated that the LOC was not to be crossed so as to
avoid escalation.
24. The initial assessment was that about 200-300 Pak Army regulars and trained
mujahideen had infiltrated and occupied unheld areas. By 18 May it became apperent that
the strength was greater, 600 to 800 Pak regulars and not mujahideen had infiltrated. The
Defence Minister visited forward areas on 12 to 14 May, he was accompanied by the
GOC-in-C Northern Command and the 15 Corps Commander. The PM was then briefed
on India‟s plan to evict the intruders.
25. Initial Aim. The initial aim of Indian forces was to establish contact, assess
the extent of the intrusions and contain the enemy.
26. Establishing Firm Bases and Patrolling. Consequently a series of attacks were
launched on features held by the Pak troops. In the face of heavy fire and intense
oppositions our troops established viable firm bases and carried out intensive patrolling
to find out exact deployment and strength of the intruders. It gradually emerged that a
large number of the enemy were well entrenched and it would require a deliberate effort
to evict them.
27. On 26 May the IAF joined Operation Vijay and air strikes were begun. MIG-21,
MIG-27 fighters and MI-17 helicopter gunships were used out of Srinagar and Awantipur
airfields.
28. On the subsequent two days two fighters and a helicopter were lost, two due to
enemy action and one due to mechanical failure.
29. Indian Plan of Operations. The Indian plan of operations was to- first evict
the enemy from those areas where he was dominating NH 1A and then from other areas.
Priority for capture of objectives were as under:-
(a) Priority 1. Dras Sector
(b) Priority 2. Mushkoh Valley Sector, initially to be encircled.
(c) Priority 3. Batalik Sector.
(d) Priority 4. Kaksar Sector. This area was not held in strength by Pak
Troops and areas held did not dominate Indian lines of communication.
30. Use of Troops. Important aspects of use of our troops were:-
(a) The Indian Army used about 17 battalions to evict the intruders.
154
(b) During conduct of actual operations troops were moved from one sector to
another to achieve concentration of force at the required place.
(c) Many of the troops employed were from out of the area of operations and
hence had to be acclimatized before being committed to battle.
(d) Time would be required to move and acclimatize troops; dump
ammunition, fuel and supplies, hence the operation could not be time bound.
31. Crossing the LOC. It was a major dilemma on whether to permit troops to cross
the LOC, and in the process lose all the international goodwill earned through restraint, or
continue to lose brave men as the intruders continued to fire from positions of advantage.
Crossing the LOC would have resulted in escalation and could have had two major
negative outcomes:-
(a) It would have made Pak insecure and thus threaten the use of nuclear
weapons. This would have led to rapid international intervention.
(b) India has had major problems in its international PR battle over Kashmir,
crossing the LOC would have further worsened the situation.
32. The decision not to cross the LOC, though at high military cost, was a mature and
diplomatically astute move which showed the world that we demonstrated a high degree
of restraint and acted responsibly in managing the crisis.
Defeating the Enemy
33. A number of very important battles were waged throughout the four section i.e.
Dras, Mushkoh, Batalik and Kaksar. A few of them are `Battle of Tololing‟, „Battle of
Tiger Hill‟, „Battle of pt 4875‟, „Battle of Batalik‟, Capture of pt 5203 etc. „Battle of
Tiger hill‟ only is being discussed here.
Battle of Tiger Hill
34. Tiger Hill is the most dominating features in the Drass Sector. From here, well
entrenched intruders had directed precise artillery fire on the Srinagar-Leh highway for
over a month.
35. The Plan. It was estimated that the enemy had about a platoon plus located on
Tiger Hill itself and some additional troops were seen moving in the area. However there
was limited knowledge of enemy defences. A Mountain Brigade was tasked to clear the
feature and was allotted 4 x Inf Bn. It was also felt by the GOC of Mountain Division
that ideally Point 4875 and Tiger Hill should be attacked simultaneously to keep enemy
attention diverted. However, the paucity of artillery precluded this option, thus it was
decided that Tiger Hill would be attacked one day prior to Point 4875.
36. The plan was for GRENADIERS Bn to launch a three pronged attack on Tiger
Hill from South, East and North East, from the firm bases provided by SIKH Bn. Thus
GRENADIERS established a fire base at Point 4460 and an administrative base at
Huliyal in preparation for the attack.
155
37. Conduct The attack commenced as planned at 2000 hrs on 03 July 99. Due to
bad weather and poor visibility progress was very slow. By 0200 hours on 04 July, the
Ghataks got a foothold and against fearful odds managed to hold on. During this action
Sepoy Yogendra Singh, part of the Ghatak platoon, showed inordinate heroism and
indomitable spirit. Despite being grievously wounded he continued climbing the sheer
cliff face and destroyed two enemy bunkers that were holding the assault, killing the
enemy in fierce hand to hand combat. For this act he was awarded the PARAM VIR
CHAKRA (PVC).
38. D Company from the East also managed to come close to the Top. Throughout
04 July our troops were around Tiger Hill Top from three sides and continued a fierce
exchange of fire. Apprehending that the enemy would be able to reinforce Tiger Hill
along the ridge from the West the Brigade Commander ordered the reserve company of
SIKH to be located at Helmet. After a steep climb under intense fire the SIKH managed
to get a foothold on India Gate and Helmet in the early hours on 05 July. This foothold
was further reinforced on 06 July.
39. Realising that the SIKHs had interposed themselves in between, at 0600 hours on
06 July, the enemy launched a series of counterattacks supported by heavy artillery fire.
Fierce fighting continued throughout the day and the SIKH being in the open, suffered
heavy casulities and were forced back from Helmet to India Gate. But, with great grit
and determination, they held on and then in a brave riposte they turned the tables on the
enemy by retaking Helmet.
40. On the night of 07/08 July , GRENADIERS launched an attack on areas of
Reverse Slope and captured them by 0800 hours 08 July. On 11 July C Company
GRENADIERS captured Rocky Knob and Rhino Horn. This brought an end to the Tiger
Hill operations and effectively defeated Pak‟s Kargil adventure.
41. Unit Citations. The COAS awarded unit citations to SIKH for `West of Tiger
Hill‟ and GRENADIERS for `Tiger Hill‟.
Military Leadership Lessons
42. Leader-Ship. This conflict re-emphasised the importance of military
leadership at all levels for successful conduct of war. Of particular importance are:-
(a) Professional integrity.
(b) Ability to lead by personal example.
(c) Training of one‟s command, particularly for the unforeseen.
(d) Knowledge of terrain and troops in the area of command.
(e) Physical fitness, particularly in terrain such as this.
156
The Media
43. This has often been referred to India‟s `first media war‟ as for the first time the
media was so pervasive on the battlefield and war reporting so much in real time. The
media brought the war into every Indian‟s home by the regular coverage of the fighting,
the trials and tribulations of the Indian soldier fighting in such harsh conditions. The
media was possibly the single most important factor in generating intense patriotism.
44. Initially the Army was not well prepared to handle this massive media attention
and banned entry of the media into the region. This policy was however soon reversed
and better engagement of the media resulted. Detailed briefing arrangements were made
in Kargil and in Delhi. In Delhi the organizational face to the media consisted of the
spokesman of the Ministry of External Affairs (MEA), and representatives of the Army,
Navy and Air Force of the equivalent rank of Colonel. A Liaison Cell under a Major
General was created at Army HQ to prepare media kits and press releases in real time.
The outcome of this concerted effort to engage the media gradually resulted in high
credibility of the governments and the military‟s actions to evict the intruders.
45. Internationally too, the media was invaluable in conveying India‟s restraint and
measured response to the world, quickly swinging world opinion in India‟s favour.
46. It cannot be said that the media obediently reported everything that the official
spokesmen gave out. Government policy and military actions were questioned,
generating a healthy debate about national security in the country.
Conclusion
47. Dras is reputed to be one of the coldest places in the world and from the heights
of Tololing and Tiger Hill bitter winds sweep down on the men that dare to tread here.
The indomitable men of the Indian Army braved enemy action and terrain to make
previously little known places like Mashkoh, Kaksar, Bimbat, Batalik, Yaldor and Turtok
household names synonymous with courage.
48. This was no mere border war or another artillery exchange that characterizes the
LOC and Actual Ground Position Line (AGPL). The `Fourth War‟ for Kashmir was an
extraordinary war, likely to be recorded in history as being fought in the most
inhospitable battle ground in the history of warfare.
SECTION-3
BIOGRAPHY OF SUCESSFUL GENERALS
PATTON
Introduction
1. Patton was born in 1885 in affluent circumstances. His father was a wealthy
rancher, but his grandfather was a Colonel in the Confederate Army and was killed in the
157
American Civil War. In 1904 he entered West point through the Virginia Military
Academy . He took five years to commission having failed in mathematics and hence
relegated for a year .He was commissioned into the Cavalry in 1909. In 1912 he was
selected as ADC to Chief of Army Staff and where he came to know many who later
came into prominence, including Stimson, the future Secretary of State of War in World
war II. In 1912 he represented the USA in the Olympiad games at Stockholm in the
Modern Military Pentathlon.
Patton‟s Military Career
2. In 1916 he took part in Punitive Expedition into Mexico in pursuit of Panch Villa,
a Mexican bandit as Headquarters Commandant and acting ADC to General Pershing.
He experienced almost a year of active service, full of speed with dash and adventure.
Patton‟s military career covers a period from before World War I, until the end of Word
War II in Europe. He had started his active service career under General Pershing in
Mexico, even before the US entered World War I. Even at that time, he had made his
impact as a dashing, bold and unconventional officer showing great promise.
3. Patton is still a most controversial military figure of World War II. His military
career is enveloped in controversies.
World War I
4. In 1917 he went over with the American Expeditionary Force to France as
General Pershing‟s aide. He rose from the lowly rank of Captain in 1916 to a Colonel
Commanding the US Ist Brigade Tank Corps in 1918 having distinguished himself in
Argonne battle, been wounded and decorated for gallantry in action, with Distinguished
Service Corps (DSC). It is typical of the man, that he had also been admonished for
taking too many risks.
Between the World Wars
5. Between the two World Wars, he had gone through the normal professional
training indicative of higher promotion. World War II found him a keen and active
student of mobile warfare. Well imbued with the teaching of Liddell Hart and equally
well in military history, covering the past many centuries of warfare, he was convinced
that American required well trained forces capable of large scale operations, using
armour and mobility, in both of which the Americans would have an advantage over their
allies as also the Germans. It was with this end, that he trained his armoured division for
carrying out what appeared to be at that time, impossibly long maneuvers in the deserts of
California.
6. Patton‟s entire back-ground pointed the way for his advancement to high rank.
He had important connection to sustain him on the one hand; and on the other, he had
trained himself to be thorough professional, whose job was to get the best results fastest.
At one time he had feared that he would be considered too old to command a division,
but that was overlooked due to his competence, assisted, needless to say, by his
connections. He had, also established a style for himself by which he felt he could get
across to his troops, imbue them with his own galvanising fervour for military perfection.
158
World War II- North Africa
7. He started his armoured career by taking command of a Brigade of the 2
Armoured Division, ultimately rising to its command. The division acquired a great
reputation and served to be the breeding ground of many of America‟s armoured
commanders. He therefore, can be said to have made a deep and important impact on the
moulding of many of America‟s armoured commanders.
8. In August 1942, Patton was appointed the Commanding General (CG) of the
Western Task Force landing in Morocco- North Africa. He was at that time a Major
General. Although the landing operations in Morocco did not involve any major
operations, they did indicate enormous problems pertaining to command and control and
in dealing with the allies. Patton with his characteristic aplomb came through with
flying colours, although unconventional approach to the problem did raise many an eye
brow.
9. Pattern recalls that one of the most important things he did during this landing,
was to remain on the beaches for 18 hours at a stretch to quieten the nerves of raw
troops and bring order to the confusion which prevailed. “People say that Army
Commanders should not indulge in such practices. My theory is that Army commanders
should do what is necessary”. During the fighting as also the negotiations which took
place in Morocco, Patton made a great impression on those who came in contact with
him. The landing itself presented many problems, not the least of which was the
greenness of the American Troops. It required Patton‟s personality and presence on the
beaches to get the troops to move in and extend the beach head.
10. Patton, however, caught the eye of Churchill and Roosevelt when they came to
attend the Casabalanca conference. Patton was the host. Churchill described the
management of this Conference as “beautiful”. Roosevelt reviewed 40,000 troops fresh
from battle, but immaculately turned out, each man the epitome of discipline and self
respect. But behind this exterior show went the serious business of transforming
Morocco into a first class base to take more US troops for North Africa. At the same time
serious training started, and strict discipline including the wearing of neckties, legging
and helmets.
Tunisia
11. On 1 February 1943, Fredendall was removed and Patton was moved over from
Morocco to replace him as Cdr US II Corps. Patton‟s immediate task was to galvanise II
Corps into an efficient fighting formation for battle of Gafsa. This he did by his
characteristic insistence on discipline, turn out and leadership, with himself being the
driving force. In Patton‟s own words, “ I have been here for 43 days, fought several
successful battles, commanded 95,800, men lost about 10 pounds, gained the third star
and a hell of a lot of praise and confidence otherwise I am the same.
Sicily
12. The attack on Sicily, was the first major amphibious operation of world War II
designed to attack Hitler‟s Fortress Europe. Two Armies, Montgomery‟s Eighth and
Patton‟s Seventh were to be employed. Patton insisted that American troops should
159
continue to be dressed formally, with neckties and leggings in sharp contrast to the
British, who were more comfortably and casually attired. This aspect of Patton‟s
discipline caused far greater heart burning amongst his troops and his Commanders. But
he was determined to make the civilian turned into soldier Americans to realize the value
of these outward symbols of discipline. He felt that discipline was a precursor for valour
and he over and over again thought that without disciplined valour, there could be no
success. The initial landing of Patton‟s army were chaotic. Once again, by his personal
dash and drive, he aided the troops on their initial objective and inspired his commanders
to heroic action.
13. At the end of the Sicilian campaign, Seventh Army as a formation was second to
none in the allied armies with an identity of its own, and Patton had won a reputation as
an aggressive, exuberant personality with a will to win.
North West Europe
14. Patton‟s career as a Commander in the North West European Campaign falls into
some distinct compartments. In time-frame it extends from August 1944 to April 1945.
Birth of the Third Army
15. By the time the Sicilian campaign came to its end. The Germans were well aware
of the military potentials of Patton. In fact he was the only American General who had
any reputation. News of his and of his command were therefore, of utmost importance to
them. For the same reasons, the secrecy which was to surround this army was of
paramount importance to the allies. The Third Army was most lavishly equipped with
tanks and transport. It is said that when planning, Patton personally always used the
Michelin tourist map. He considered that details should be left to be wrestled with on
large scale maps by his staff. He was satisfied with the broad perspective, and he had full
confidence in his staff which had been trained to carry out his orders.
Dash Across France
16. In the fluid campaign which ensued, Patton using his strong mechanized forces
as also the offensive spirit inculcated in his Army, surprised the German Generals, when
his columns covered 50 miles a day. Although the Third Army was halted between 16
and 18th of August, Patton‟s Forces were on the Seine by 25th August. Third Army by
passed Paris leaving it to Free French formations to take its surrender.
17. German counter attacks began but Patton with some sixth sense had expected this
and they were blunted. However even during this temporary phase of defensive the Third
Army made more spectacular gains and cleared the eastern region of France right upto
the formidable fortress of Metz it is said that during this period Patton and his Third
Army resorted to some shady dealings in obtaining petrol, ammunition supplies allotted
to other formations and by not declaring when they captured large quantities of petrol
from the enemy.
18. Patton‟s dash across France was the culmination of a lifetime devoted to being
ready for this supreme moment. The soldiers of the Third army were freeing the
countryside from the German yoke. The soldiers were cheered and greeted with flowers
in every town where they passed, for they were the saviours of France.
160
Epilogue
19. Patton went on to receive hero‟s welcome in the United States soon after World
War II. He had finally to relinquish command of his beloved Third Army. He was
posted to the Fifteenth Army, a “paper” posting to a “paper” Army with little to do except
compile the record of the operations since the D Day.
20. Death came to Patton shortly thereafter when on 9th Dec 1945 he was involved in
an automobile accident. Paradoxically, he who dreamt of a soldier‟s sudden death in
battle, lingered on for 12 days.
Patton as a Military Leader
21. The strongest impression of Patton which prevails today is that of a leader. He
comes out as one of only two striking military leaders of the United States Army from
World War II, the other being McArthur. In the American military legend, he is
eulogized and Hollywood (Paramount) has made a full length film of him which shows
him even larger than life. It is worth examining Patton as a leader.
22. Right at the very onset it must be pointed out that Patton was made in the heroic
mould of the dashing military leader . He had aimed for this right from childhood. From
the very beginning of his military career he had dreamt of leading an army and at the
same time had prepared himself for doing so. All the conventional qualities required of
a military leader were in him . He was an impressive personality by any standards,
athletic, well-built, imposing in all respect except for his high-pitched voice and
somewhat small beady eyes.
23. Patton believed in the effect of the spoken word on his audience. Right from his
young days he had found he had verbal facility for the picturesque phrase. He believed
that attention of troops could be riveted to what he was saying if it was said in the most
earthy if not a profane manner. At times this was carried to a ludicrous extreme. A senior
officer in the position of Corps and Army Commander using blasphemous profanity in
his speech becomes counter productive and irritating rather than striking. For the media.
however, he became “Good Copy” instantly and his quotable quotes got him headlines .
24. If in a matter of appearance and speech there were elements of the theatrical, in
other aspects of his leadership traits, he was genuinely sound. He had vision, ability,
courage, drive and confidence. His vision was responsible for enabling him to see far
earlier than any other American field commander the value of mobility which armour and
mechanized forces provided.
25. His courage was legendary. Right from his earliest days he had shown this. He
believed that the best way to command was from the front end and as he rose in rank, he
was convinced that irrespective of rank, the leader had to exercise his influence where
things were at there stickiest. In the bargain, if there was an element of danger involved,
that had to be taken in his stride.
26. Patton firmly believed that any action taken quickly and executed violently was
sure to achieve results far out of proportion to more deliberate and sedately carried out
ones. He used to say that in the military field that “the best was often the worst enemy of
161
the good”. Temperamentally he was impatient, but he also knew that when there was a
plentitude of material it was possible to steam roller through, if the action be carried out
vigourously and violently. He used these tactics to the best advantage and trained his
command accordingly. He had found from experience that the personal drive and zest of
the Commanding General would often produce desired results and there are numerous
examples from his campaigns to illustrate this. His personal example on the beaches at
Morocco and Sicily, his personal reconnaissance‟s and pushing troops forward over
rivers and obstacles are indicative of this.
27. There is one other quality of leadership which appeared at that time strange to the
American soldier and public. That was Patton‟s religious belief, it would appear that they
were not aware of many other dashing Captains of war who have been moulded thus. In
other countries also religion has given great support to military leadership, their faith was
further sustained by religion. Thus religion was in no way incompatible with the
profanity of his speech, which was a veneer which had formed itself into a habit.
28. There is one other aspect in the leadership qualities of Patton which need
emphasis, his loyalty to his commanders and staff. It is known how he became
subordinate to Bradley in North West Europe after having been his superior in the Sicily
campaign. Seniority wise Patton was the senior. Bradley had doubts about having Patton
serving under him in Europe but these were soon dispelled , because Patton “joined him
eagerly, as a friend, without peak, rancour or grievance”. Their association together was
one of the highlights of such associations in World War II. In the same way, Patton was
loyal to his subordinates. His Headquarters staff consisted of average men but he had
been able to weld them into a well-knit team delegating responsibility which in return
begot trust. As the war progressed, his Third Army had an elan and pride not only in
themselves but in the commander, they nick-named him “Georgie”.
29. We must also examine the elements of instability in Patton‟s make up. It was this,
which led him to this screening range at minor misdemeanours. In a way it could be said
that he let off steam to make up for the stress and strain he was under when working at
such high pressure. The well known slapping incidents in Sicily could have emanated
from such a situation. However, this was a facet of his make up which was a weakness.
Great leaders have perforce to keep themselves under great control and not permit their
emotions to surface in any manner which would be derogatory to the functioning of their
Command.
30. Having seen the leadership traits of Patton, it is worth examining whether it was
the situation which created this leadership image. In World War II, the press and to an
extent radio had begun to emerge as important factor for the maintenance of morale not
only of fighting troops but of the public at home. The Americans had no outstanding
public figure in the military field in the Western Theatre until the advent of Eisenhower
and Patton. Whereas Eisenhower was the kindly father figure at the highest level of the
military echelon, Patton was the dashing hero on the battle field.
31. As we have noted earlier, the character traits were ideal for the purpose. In some
cases the exaggerated manner in which these were projected were excellent copy. As
such it may be said that Patton was made to appear the larger-than-life-hero to meet the
situation for consumption of the home population. In a way, this was also his undoing,
because such publicity will often tend to raise animosities based on factors other than the
162
capability or otherwise of military leadership in the field. As Bradley says “Few
Generals could surpass Patton as a Field Commander, but he had one enemy he could not
vanquish and that was his quick tongue”.
32. In conclusion, while discussing Patton‟s leadership qualities, it is worth noting
that his command was up to that of a Field Army numbering some hundred thousand men
or more. Except for the brief period in Morocco and another in military government he
was basically only a Field Commander. Problems of State as such, hardly came his way.
It is therefore, difficult to say how he would have been measured up to as one of the
“Great Captains” who have to deal with major strategic as also national and international
problems. As a Field Commander, he was indeed great and the tradition he laid down for
this type of leadership is without doubt of a high order to be followed by all Military
Commanders who are in direct contact with troops. The pitfalls of publicity are, however,
a warning, as also the need for emotional balance.
BIOGRAPHY OF GENERAL MACARTHUR
Early Years
1. Douglas MacArthur was born on 26 January 1880 in Arsenal Barracks at Little
Rock. His father, Lieutenant General Arthur MacArthur was at that time commanding a
company of the 13th Infantry. Born in a family steeped in martial traditions, he became
associated with the Army from his birth. This was only in the fitness of things as he was
in later years to become the greatest General of his country.
2. Douglas MacArthur‟s grand father and father had migrated from Scotland to
America. His grandfather joined militia attaining rank of Captain and later of Judge
Advocate General of Western Military District. He became Governor of his state for a
short period and later on served as Judge of Supreme Court for 18 Years. His father
(Arthur MacArthur) was only 16 year old when the civil war broke out. Even at that
tender age, he was keen to answer the call to arms and join the Army. His father took him
to President Lincoln to get him a Presidential vacancy at the United State Military
Academy. The President put his arm round the young boy and told him that all
Presidential vacancies had been filled for that year but promised to get him one the
following year. Arthur however, could not wait that long and joined 24th Wisconsin
Volunteer Infantry as its Adjutant in the rank of Lieutenant. He saw action in several
battles during the Civil War. In his first battle he was cited for gallantry in action and
given the brevet rank of Captain. In those days except for Medal of Honour there was no
other gallantry award. Later at the battle of Missionary Ridge he led a remarkable
charge. Against withering fire he scaled the ridge and planted the regimental flag on top
when other members of the colour party had been killed or wounded. The regiment
rallied and followed him to the top of the ridge. For this supreme act of gallantry, he was
awarded the Medal of Honour. He was also given command of the regiment and he led it
throughout the war attaining the rank of Colonel at the age of 19. He became the
youngest officer of this rank in the Union Army. After the Civil War, he joined the
regular army and slowly worked his way up the promotion ladder. For 23 years after the
Civil War, he served as a Captain as promotions in the Army were slow. On promotion to
163
the rank of Major, he served in the Adjutant General‟s Branch at Washington and after
some time was promoted Lieutenant Colonel.
3. In 1898 war broke out with Spain and Arthur MacArthur, father of Douglas Mac
Arthur, attained the rank of Brigadier General. He was assigned for service in the
Philippines where he distinguished himself, earning promotion to the rank of Major
General, the highest rank in the US Army in those days. After the war he was appointed
Governor General of the Philippines. Although he was a successful administrator, some
misunderstanding arose between him and the Administration at home. This cost him the
appointment of the Chief of Staff of the Army, However, after his assignment in the
Philippines, he was promoted to the rank of Lieutenant General by a special act of the
Congress with a provision that this rank be abolished after him. He thus became the only
officer in the US Army to attain this rank until the ban imposed by the Congress was
lifted during the First World War. He was asked to carry out a tour of the Russo-Japanese
battle fields and of the Far East. After completing this tour, he retired from the Army and
died some years later in 1912 while addressing a reunion of the veterans of his old 24th
Wisconsin Regiment.
4. Douglas Mac Arthur spent the early years of his life living with his father in
various frontier posts. He saw the life of the Wild West. In his early upbringing he was
not only influenced by his parents but also by the regimental sergeant major. It was only
natural that he should aspire for a career in the Army. When his father was posted to
Texas after his tenure at Washington, young Douglas joined the West Texas Military
Academy. Good at both studies and sports, he appeared for the competitive examination
to West Point and came out first. He joined West Point in 1899.
5. War with Spain had broken and Douglas wanted to skip his cadetship to enlist in
the Army so that he could see active service. His father advised him against this saying,
“ My son, there will be plenty of fighting in the coming years and of a magnitude far
beyond this , Prepare yourself”. Douglas took his fathers prophetic advice and stayed on
at West Point to complete his cadetship.
6. While Douglas MacArthur was at West Point, his father General MacArthur had
become a national hero for his role in the Spanish American War and for combating
insurgency in the Philippines. This gave Douglas a certain amount of prominence at
West Point and he had to suffer more then the normal share of “ragging” from the
seniors. A little before MacArthur had joined West Point, a “fresher” had been made to
leave the institution because of ragging and he subsequently died of tuberculosis. This
sparked off a controversy and the President ordered an inquiry into the practice of
ragging at West Point. MacArthur was an important witness before the court of inquiry
and he was required to divulge the name of his seniors who had ragged him. His parents
had taught him never to lie and never to tattle. He was therefore determined not to
disclose any names even though his refusal to do so might result in his expulsion. The
whole incident passed off without the authorities taking the extreme step against him for
not disclosing any name. It was a period of trial for MacAruther in which he amply
showed his moral fibre.
7. MacAurthur distinguished himself at West Point in all spheres-at games, in
studies and in his profession. He was appointed First Captain on the basis of his military
performance and he also stood first in scholarship. He scored the highest marks registered
164
for a century at West Point. As First Captain he led the line of 93 graduates when he
passed out from West Point in 1903, proudly watched by both his parents. He was
commissioned in the Crops of Engineers. In those days top ranking cadets were given the
choice of the branch and they generally opted for the Engineers because of better
promotion prospects. MacArthur also volunteered for service in the Philippines where his
father had won laurels and there was some chance of active fighting against insurgents.
Within ten days of joining his Engineers battalion at San Francisco, he sailed for Manila
in September 1903.
8. Soon after landing in the Philippines, MacArthur was engaged in various
engineering duties. He was employed in constructing piers and docks at the harbour. He
went out with a detachment to cut timber in the nearby jungle. Despite his early frontier
training, he allowed himself to be waylaid by two guerillas in the jungle .One of them
fired antiquated rifle and the slug tore the top of his hat. MacArthur was quick with his
pistol and shot both the guerillas before his men joined up with him. What his men saw
on arrival only helped to build their confidence in their young leader.
9. In 1904 General MacArthur was appointed Military Attache to the American
Legation at Tokyo and Chief US Military adviser for the Russo- Japanese War. His Son
Douglas Mac-Arthur was appointed as his ADC. Soon after his return from the Far
Eastern tour, he was appointed ADC to President Theodore Roosevelt. Mac Arthur was
posted to Fort Leavenworth with the Third Battalion of Engineers. He served with this
unit for three years and was promoted Captain in 1911. In 1913 he was selected for the
General Staff, the brains of the Army in planning operation and deciding matters of
highest importance.
First World War and Inter War Years
10. First World War broke out in 1914 but America was initially not involved in the
hostilities. She joined the war only in 1917. MacArthur was detailed as a military aide
to Mr. Baker, Secretary of War. MacArthur suggested to have an adhoc division with
elements of National Guard from all States which would “stretch over the country like a
rainbow” for sending to France. General Mann was appointed Commander of 42
Division, popularly known as the Rainbow Division, and Douglas MacArthur became the
Chief of Staff of the Division.
11. MacArthur sailed with the Rainbow Division for France in October 1917. On
arrival in France after an initial period of training and reorganization, Rainbow Division
moved into a combat sector. He accompanied a French riding party to bring German
prisoners. He acquitted himself extremely well in the savage fighting that took place in
this raid into German lines. He was awarded the Silver Star for extraordinary heroism
and gallantry in action. In March 1918 the Rainbow Division was ready for the acid testthe
attack. It had withstood an enemy raid and endured a night gas attack. MacArthur
obtained his commander‟s permission to accompany the leading troops. The Division
despite its mounting casualties secured its objective. For his gallantry in this action
MacArthur was awarded the Distinguished Service Medal. The last and biggest German
attack of the war was launched in July 1918 and the Rainbow Division again acquitted
itself well. MacArthur was promoted Brigadier General and given command of 84
Brigade in the Division. Position at Cote de Chatillon held by German in strength was
holding up the advance of the Rainbow Division.
165
12. MacArthur was ill and suffering from gas wounds. He, however next morning led
the attack capturing Cote de Chatillon after heavy fighting in which his troops suffered
many casualties. When the war ended, MacArthur temporarily took over command of
the Rainbow Division. General Pershing the C-in-C of American Forces in France
referred to him as the bravest of the brave in a brave division. For his outstanding
qualities of leadership and personal gallantry he was awarded the Distinguished Service
Medal, three silver stars and many foreign decorations including the French Legion of
Honour. He, however, again could not get Medal of Honour, the highest US award for
gallantry even though he had been recommended for it. On return to the USA in 1919 he
was appointed Superintendent of the West Point, a post reserved for an officer expected
to reach the highest rank in the American Army. At 39, he became the youngest officer
to hold this coveted appointment.
13. In 1922, MacArthur was posted to the Philippines as Commander of the Military
District of Manila and later of the Scout Brigade. In 1925 he was promoted Major
General in command of the Philippines Division and two years later as Commanding
General of all American troops on the islands. Soon after his arrival for this tenure in the
Philippines he set about demolishing the concept of colonial theory of racial superiority
in his own way. He found that on the three-decker boats, only American officers and
their families could travel on the upper deck. Fillipinos had to travel on the lower decks
with the enlisted men. He had this arrangement changed at once. Little stories like this
endeared MacArthur to the Fillipinos.
14. In October 1930 MacArthur was appointed Chief of Staff with the four stars of a
General. MacArthur‟s major contribution during the five years that he was Chief of Staff
was to reorganize the American Army, keeping in view the nature of the coming war.
MacArthur completed his tenure as Chief of Staff in 1935 and was appointed as Military
Adviser to the President of the Philippines. A few days before MacArthur left President
Roosevelt spoke to him “ Douglas if war should suddenly come, don‟t wait for orders to
return home. Grab the first transportation you can find. I want you to command my
armies”. It was gracious of the President to so speak to him. It showed his recognition
of the patriotic motives of MacArthur.
Second World War
15. War broke out in Europe in September 1939 but America kept out of it for two
years. By 1941 it became increasingly clear that America would soon be involved in the
war. Japanese threat loomed large over the Pacific. To guard her interests in the Pacific,
America based a large fleet with supporting Air Force at Pearl Harbour in Hawai Islands.
In July 1941 MacArthur was recalled to service in the rank of Lieutenant General and
appointed Commanding General of the United States Army Forces in the Far East. The
strategic importance of the Philippines in preventing Japanese advance to the South or the
West was obvious. The forces available on the island were not adequate to meet the
Japanese challenge.
16. The Japanese struck at Pearl Harbour on 7 December 1941 and in a surprise attack
wrote off the US Pacific Fleet. Eight heavy battleships, two cruisers and several
destroyers were either sunk or put out of action in an hour or two. The strike at Pearl
Harbour not only damaged the US Pacific Fleet but also crippled US Air Power and
166
eroded its ability to put up effective defence of the Philippines. On 8 December the first
Japanese air attack came over the Philippines. With the ground forces denied effective
air and naval support, the stage was set for Japanese invasion of the Philippines. The
invasion commenced on 10 December with the Japanese Fourteenth Army. The situation
was grim for MacArthur. His two Corps, one in the North and the other in the South had
to steadily yield ground. Japanese combat strength on the ground was almost double.
MacArthur was quick to perceive the Japanese plan of closing on the plains of Central
Luzon around Manila and annihilating his Army in a two pronged offensive. He carried
out a masterly withdrawal by side-stepping out of Central Luzon in to the Jungles of
Bataan Peninsula.
17. Bataan was organized for protracted defence. Savage fighting continued on the
peninsula for nearly five months when the defenders were forced to surrender. This
gained valuable time for the Allies and stood in the way of further Japanese expansion.
By February, through heavy casualties and lack of supplies, the situation was desperate.
The Japanese sent a message to MacArthur to surrender but he was determined to fight it
out till the bitter end. He was already making plans for starting a guerilla war against the
Japanese on Mindano island after Bataan was lost. Japanese record of unbroken success
in Indo-China, Malaya, Indonesia and Philippines posed a grave danger to Australia.
Australian Cabinet decided to request US government to depute MacArthur as the
Supreme Commander. President Roosevelt agreed and issued a personal order as his
country‟s Commander-in- Chief asking MacArthur to leave the Philippines and proceed
to Australia. MacArthur was reluctant to comply because he did not want to desert his
troops at Bataan. He was persuaded to leave because by doing so he would be able to
organise a relief operation from Australia to rescue the Philippines.
18. The Japanese had got to know of MacArthur attempting to break through their
cordon. Their radio announced that if captured, he would be publicity hanged on the
Imperial Plaza in Tokyo. This threat did not materialize, but five years later, MacArthur
as Supreme Commander took the salute of the Occupation Troops at the Imperial Plaza
from the precise spot, where his execution had been so confidently predicted. The US
Government awarded MacArthur the medal of Honour, its highest award for gallantry,
for his outstanding leadership in the Philippines. The citation for his award read “He
mobilized, trained and led an army which has received world acclaim for its gallant
defence against tremendous superiority of enemy forces in men and arms. His utter
disregard of personal danger under heavy fire, his calm judgment in each crisis inspired
his troops, galvanised the spirit of the Fillipino people and confirmed the faith of the
American people in their Armed Forces”.
19. MacArthur found a spirit of defeatism rampant in Australia. Plans were being
made for holding the Brisbane line which meant giving up two thirds of Australian
territory in the North. The newly appointed Supreme Commander decided completely to
abandon the Brisbane Line plan and chose to defend Australia a thousand miles forward
in the mountains of New Guinea. The battle for Australia was to be fought beyond her
borders. If successful, he would not only save Australia but switch over from the
defensive to the offensive for eventually liberating the Philippines. After his victory in
New Guinea, he started his island-hopping operations. He leap-frogged from one island
to the other which was hailed as something new in warfare. He opposed the idea of direct
attack on the strong bases of the enemy. Instead he chose to bypass these bases and in the
process secured lightly held islands. The Japanese strongpoint at Rabaul was bypassed.
167
This meant bypassing 60,000 Japanese troops and leaving them for mosquitoes, hunger
and disease to finish off.
20. In October 1944 MacArthur redeemed his promise of returning to the Philippines.
In a series of brilliant operations on the ground MacArthur neutralized eight Japanese
armies on these islands. At the end of this campaign the Japanese lost 80,000 counted
killed. The campaign on the Philippines lasted nine months. Soon after the liberation of
the Philippines, atom bombs were dropped at Hiroshima and Nagasaki in August 1945.
Japanese surrendered and this ended the second World War.
Japan, Korea and After
21. On 15 August 1945 the Emperor of Japan in a dramatic broad cast to his prople
announced the capitulation of his country. On the same date President Truman appointed
MacArthur as the Supreme Commander of Allied Powers in Japan. MacArthur took the
formal surrender of Japan on board US battleship Missouri on September 2, 1945. Apart
from disarming and demobilising seven million Japanese soldiers, MacArthur was now
entrusted with the responsibility for administering a war-ravaged country of 80 million
people. MacArthur wanted to carve a place for himself in history not as a conqueror but
as a protector of Japan. He planned to introduce reforms in Japan to bring it abreast of
modern progressive thought.
22. After disarming the Japanese forces, one of the first tasks facing MacArthur was
to abolish militarism in Japan. This was achieved in many different ways. Apart from
punishing war criminals, introducing equality among people, emancipating the Japanese
women, liberalizing the system of education and separating the State from the Church,
MacArthur steadily divested the Emperor of his divine halo and decentralized political
power. Based on the new constitution, general elections were held in April 1946 which
were the first completely free elections in the history of Japan. Another far-reaching
achievement of MacArthur‟s administration in Japan was the land reforms introduced by
him. The education system was liberalized and the previous militaristic ultranationalistic
approach discarded.
23. MacArthur‟s role as Pro-consul of Japan for five years was a great achievement of
history. When he left that country two million people lined his route to the airport and
bade him an affectionate farewell. Many years after his official association with Japan
had ended, the Japanese Government awarded him the Grand Cordon of the Order of the
Rising Sun- Japan‟s highest award reserved for monarchs and heads of Government.
Towards the later stages of MacArthur‟s stay in Japan he was again to answer the call of
his profession and be engaged in war. His last campaign was fought in Korea. Till Japan
was defeated, Korea was her colony. In the summer of 1950 North Korean Communists
were threatening to attack South Korea. On 25 June 1950 the expected North Korea
assault started. They soon captured Seoul, the capital of South Korea. MacArthur was
suddenly given the task of defending South Korea. MacArthur mobilized his forces with
lightning speed and airdropped one division around Pusan. The presence of American
ground troops imposed caution on the North Koreans and they halted their advance to
bring up their heavy artillery and other equipment. This enabled MacArthur to gain ten
precious days for bringing in his remaining ground forces from Japan. The battle for
Pusan continued for two months in July and August during which the offensive potential
of the North Korean Army was blunted.
168
24. In September, MacArthur was planning a counter-stroke. He planned an
amphibious landing at Inchon, the second largest port in Korea and only 20 miles from
Seoul. The seizure of Inchon and Seoul would cut the enemy‟s supply line and seal off
the entire southern peninsula. The brilliant landing at Inchon on 12 September, personally
supervised by the Supreme Commander, was a complete success. Seoul was quickly
captured and the enemy‟s supply and communications were completely cut off. Within a
month over 1,30,000 prisoners were taken and the North Korean field army was virtually
destroyed. MacArthur now raced towards the North capturing Pyongyang the capital of
North Korea on 20 October. On 27 November Communist Chinese started their massive
invasion of Korea across the Yalu bridges. Against the massive Chinese onslaught and
because of hampering restrictions from Washington, MacArthur was forced to withdraw.
The Chinese offensive having outrun its initial impetus, MacArthur now launched a
limited counter-offensive. He established the front on the 38th parallel.
25. On 11 Apr 1950 President Truman relieved Gen MacArthur of his command in
Far East. MacArthur left Tokyo at day break on 16 April 1950 to return home to
America. There was a hero‟s departure for him at Tokyo with 2 Million Japanese lining
his route and a still greater welcome for him on return to America. The period of
MacArthur‟s retirement ended after 14 years. At last the final roll call came in 1964 and
the great soldier faded out of life leaving behind a legacy of un paralleled greatness.
MacArthur as Leader
26. The wide and varied canvas of life of MacArthur establish him as a unique figure
of modern history. Seldom has any soldier been an heir to such a rich family heritage and
made it so much richer, by his own achievements. From his earlier days, he stood out as a
man of destiny to whom rank and honours would come if merit could bring them to any
man. His life was one long record of unbroken and outstanding success. Even during
adversities, whether during the siege of Bataan or on dismissal from Japan, success
appeared to smile on his fortunes, adding luster to his name and fame.
Personal Qualities
27. A deeply religious man, MacArthur upheld a high sense of values. His faith in
God always remained unshaken and he made constant reference to the Supreme Being
on all important occasions in his life-on the fall of Bataan, at the liberation of the
Philippines, at the surrender of Japan and in his address to the American Congress.
Whether as a cadet at West Point or in later life while dealing with several heads of State,
MacArthur‟s personal conduct was always unimpeachable. On a matter of a principle he
was not prepared to make any compromise. As a cadet, at the risk of his career he refused
to disclose to a Presidential Enquiry Committee, the name of senior cadets guilty of
ragging. And again as the Army Chief, he staked his career with President Roosevelt on
the issue of retrenchment of the officer cadre.
28. Intensely devoted to his family, MacArthur had a human approach to his fellow
being. He was deeply attached to his mother who lived with him after his father‟s death.
As Army Chief, he avoided social functions in Washington to be able to spend his
evenings with his old and ailing mother. He would not accept the assignment of Military
Adviser in Philippines till he was assured that his mother could accompany him. His
169
father died in 1912 while addressing a veteran‟s rally. Half a century later when he
himself was nearly 80 years old, he wrote about his passing away with a pang, “My
whole world changed that night. Never have I been able to heal the wound in my heart”.
He was also deeply attached to his wife Jean and their only son Arthur. They went
through the siege of Bataan with him and later shared in his glories. In 1943 he was
named as the father of the year in the USA for his devotion to his son. On receipt of
intimation conferring this distinction on him, he wrote, “By profession I am a soldier and
take pride in that fact, but I am prouder, infinitely prouder to be a father. A soldier
destroys in order to build; the father only builds never destroys. The one has the
potentialities of death; the other embodies creation and life. And while the hordes of
death are mighty; the battalions of life are mightier still. It is my hope that my son when I
am gone will remember me not from the battle, but in the home, repeating with him our
simple daily prayer -Our Father thou art in Heaven”.
29. His attitude to his fellow beings was commendable. Even during the colonial era
of pre-second world war days, he realised racial superiority was an outmoded concept.
His treatment of Fillipinos on equal terms won him their love and regard. With his long
experience of service in the East, he realized that the people of the Orient wanted to
shake off the shame of subjugation and demanded the dignity of equality. This realisation
stood him in good stead while ruling over Japan.
30. MacArthur had a remarkable style of speaking and writing, The language used
by him on important occasions was truly sublime, expressing great and noble ideas in the
most appropriate manner. His speech after the Japanese surrender on board the Missouri
was hailed as the greatest speech after Lincoln‟s Gettysburg address. His address to the
American Congress on being relieved of command in Japan, is a unique piece of
literature. Similarly his farewell address to the Cadets at West Point bore the hall mark of
his genius. In the same class may also be ranked his speech to the Philippine Congress at
the fifteenth anniversary of their Independence. He spoke, “The tide of world affairs ebbs
and flows in and out. Old empires die, new nations are born, alliances arise and vanish.
But through all this confusion the mutual friendship of our two countries shines like a
beacon in the night. Together we suffered in war. Together we seek the peace. And in this
long twilight era, that is neither war nor peace, we stand as firmly as before, together”.
Military Leadership
31. His military leadership can be viewed from different angles-personal bravery,
combat leadership in battle, strategic direction of campaigns and breadth of vision. In all
these spheres, he showed a touch of genius. His encounter with Fillipino guerillas, the
deep reconnaissance carried out by him at Vera Cruz, his leading the attack at Cote-de
Chatillon in France when he was suffering from gas wounds, his response to a hold up
while on the road to West Point, his landing at airfield in Japan and his reconnaissance of
the Yalu river in an unarmed aircraft were all examples of personal bravery of an
outstanding nature. The young subaltern in the Philippines was just as much regardless of
physical danger as the 70 years old Supreme Commander of the United Nations in Korea.
32. He was the guiding force of the Rainbow Division in the First World War both as
its Chief of Staff and later as one of the Brigade Commanders. He repeatedly displayed
skill and bravery of the highest order in combat leadership. He led his troops in battle by
his personal example and won several gallantry decorations. Both American and The
170
French Army Commanders referred to him as the finest and bravest officer they had ever
seen. His divisional commander said that he had commanded larger bodies of troops in
the battle line than any other officer of the American Army. It was primarily on the basis
of his achievements as a leader in battle that even before the Second World War,
President Roosevelt referred to his record in war and peace as a brilliant chapter of
American history.
33. The Second World War gave MacArthur an opportunity to show his genius in the
strategic sphere. His decision to side-step into Bataan avoiding the Japanese trap closing
on him in Central Philippines, his decision to defend Australia in the mountains of New
Guinea, his concept of island hopping operations leading to the destruction of several
Japanese armies with comparatively much less casualties of his own forces , and finally
his brilliant landing at Inchon destroying the North Korean field army prove that he was a
great master of war. Many renowned world authorities have acknowledged his military
greatness. Lord Alanbrooke the famous British Chief of Staff who had been critical of
American commanders wrote of him, “MacArthur was the greatest General and the best
strategist that the war produced. He certainly out shown Marshall, Eisenhower and all
other American and British Generals including Montgomery. As a fighter of battles and
as a leader of men, Monty was hard to beat, but I doubt if he would have shown the same
strategic genius had he been in MacArthur,s position ………….. I am convinced that, as
the war can be viewed in better perspective, it will be agreed that the strategic ability
shown by MacArthur was in a class of its own”. Similarly, that great military analyst and
thinker, Liddel Hart wrote, “MacArthur was supreme among the Generals. His
combination of strong personality, strategic grasp, tactical skill, operative mobility and
vision put him in a class above other allied commanders in any theatre”. MacArthur,s
personal bravery, his leadership in combat and his conduct of campaigns were brilliant in
every way. He also combined with all these a rare breadth of military vision. After the
first world war, he was quick to perceive the requirements of a modern officer in a
citizens‟ army and accordingly oriented the training of cadets at West Point. He also
realized the importance of the air arm in the inter-war years and was its strong exponent.
He foresaw the coming of the Second World War as the US Army Chief, and did his best
to prepare his country and his army for it.
34. MacArthur was a legendary figure with varied and outstanding achievements in
different spheres. He served his country as an active soldier for over half a century
participating in numerous campaigns and battles on three continents. If awards and
honours can be measure of judging his achievements, then he easily stands head and
shoulders above any other soldier of this century. Philippines made him a Field Marshal,
Australia awarded him the Pacific Star, Japan conferred upon him the Grand Cordon of
Rising Sun, France decorated him with the Legion of Honour and Britain made him a
Grand Knight Commander. His own country gave him the Medal of Honour, the highest
award for personal gallantry. Besides this supreme award he won the Distinguished
Service Medal for gallantry five times and the Silver Star for gallantry seven times. The
US Congress presented him with a vote of thanks of the nation and had a gold medal
struck in his honour bearing his effigy and with the following words inscribed on it:
“ Soldier of America ; Protector of
Australia; Liberator of the Philippines;
Conqueror of Japan; Defender of Korea.”
171
BIOGRAPHY OF FIELD MARSAL SAM MANEKSHAW
Early Years
1. Sam Hormusji Framji Jamshedji Manekshaw was born on 3 April 1914 into the
Manekshaw family at Amritsar. His father Captain Hormusji who saw service with the
Royal British Army as a "Medical Officer" in the Middle Eastern region of
Messopotamia during the "First World War," had come to Amritsar from Bombay where
his medical practice did not flourish too well! At Amritsar, Dr. Hormusji started a
medical practice and a chemist shop/pharmacy, where his prescriptions were formulated,
so that his patients could have easier access to medication especially when pre formulated
patented drug formulations were few and far between!
2. Although he had promise, Dr Manekshaw felt that this son, Sam, who had passed
the Senior Cambridge examination with distinction from "Sherwood" in Nainital at the
age of 15 years, was not yet ready to be on his own in England for further studies. He was
therefore admitted to the Hindu Sabha College, Amritsar. In 1931, when the practice of
training Indian Officers at "The Royal Military Academy" at Sandhurst in England came
to an end and India had its' own Military Academy set up in Dehra Dun, Sam was
amongst the first batch of Indians to qualify in the examination to gain admission and
enroll into the "Indian Military Academy" at Dehra Dun. He joined the Academy on 30th
September, 1932. Being a good tennis player, he was appointed the Captain of the
"Academy Tennis Team" and was awarded the "Tennis Blue" on 12th October 1933.
3. On passing out from the Academy he was commissioned into the Indian Army as
a Second Lieutenant in "The Frontier Force Regiment" on 4th February 1934. The "First
Course" with which Sam passed out, gave three chiefs to three Armies! They were,
General Sam Manekshaw-Indian Army, General Mohammed Musa-Pakistan Army and
General Smith Dun- Burmese Army. On completion of his attachment, as was customary
then, with a British Infantry Battalion, the 2nd Battalion the Royal Scots, he joined the
4th Battalion, 12 Frontier Force Regiment, also known as the 54th Sikhs. After partition
of India, this Regiment opted to join the Pakistan Army.
Second World War
4. In the Second Great War, he saw service with his unit on the Burma front as a part
of the famous 17 Infantry Division. On 22nd February 1942, Sam was wounded while
gallantly leading his company to capture a vital enemy position, when he took the impact
of a burst fired from a Japanese machine gun in his stomach and body. He was taken to
the "Regimental Aid Post" from where the regimental medical Officer, Captain GM
Diwan, evacuated him to the Hospital at Pegu. Here the surgeon who examined him
asked him what had happened. Sam told him, "I was kicked by a bloody mule!" Hearing
this response, the surgeon laughed and said "Given your sense of humour, it will be worth
saving you!" After being operated upon, he was evacuated to Rangoon, from where he
sailed for India in one of the last ships to leave that port before it fell to the Japanese. For
this act of gallantry he was awarded the "Military Cross".
172
Various Appointments
5. Once discharged from the hospital and reunited with his family after a long
separation, Sam was detailed to attend the "8th Staff Course", at the Staff College Quetta
(In Pakistan) from 23 August 1943 to 22 December 1943 in the rank of a temporary
Major. On completion of the Staff College Course, he was posted as the "Brigade Major",
(BM) a critical appointment, to the "Razmak Brigade" in Waziristan close to the North
Western Frontier Province, now in Pakistan. He remained in this job from 13 January to
22 October 1944 whereafter he was posted to 9/12 Frontier Force Rifles (FFR) in Burma
(now known as Myanmar) who were then on the move astride the Rangoon-Mandalay
highway as a part of the victorious 14th Army under General Slim. During the closing
days of the war, he went as a staff officer to General Daisey to Indo China, where, after
the Japanese surrender, he helped in the rehabilitation of over 10,000 Japanese prisoners
of war. He was then posted to the Staff College Quetta as General Staff Officer, Grade -2
(GSO-2). Before he could take up this assignment, he was selected by Field Marshal Lord
Claude Auchinlek, the Commander-in-Chief of India to go on a lecture tour to Australia
for a period of six months in 1946. The main purpose of this tour was to bring home to
the Australians, India‟s war effort and the achievement of its' Armed Forces since it was
perceived that this was not too well known in that region!
6. On his return from the Australian lecture tour, he was promoted to the rank of a
local Lieutenant Colonel and while continuing to be on the panel of Frontier Force
Regiment, he was posted to General Headquarters at New Delhi as General Staff Officer,
Grade-1 (GSO-1), Military Operations-3 (MO-3) till then the sole preserve of the British
Officers. He was the first Indian posted to the MO Directorate. In December 1946 when
the division of assets and regiments between Pakistan and Indian Armies crystallized a
little, and it became clear that the Frontier Force Regiment would remain with Pakistan,
Sam was empanelled on the panel of 16th Battalion of The Punjab Regiment, and posted
as GSO-1, MO-1. Here he served from 1st January 1947 to 21 July 1947. On 15th August
1947, when India became independent, Sam was transferred to the panel of the 5th Royal
Gorkha Rifles, (FF) and was posted to command the 3rd Battalion of the 5th Gorkha
Rifles. However, before he could proceed to take over this Battalion, Pakistani tribals
with the help of Pakistan Army had attacked parts of Kashmir and managed to reach
close to Srinagar. Considering the operational situation, his posting to command the
Battalion was cancelled and he continued to serve with the MO Directorate as GSO-1
(Ops) at Army HQ. It was thus that the future and first Field Marshal of the Indian Army
was denied a chance to command a Battalion in the Army! This has always been
disappointing for him.
7. At the time of these operations, Sam Manekshaw , had a ringside view of events.
Then a Lieutenant Colonel, he accompanied V P Menon on his historic mission to
Kashmir, to get the then ruler of the State of Jammu & Kashmir, Maharaja Hari Singh to
sign the "Instrument of Accession" and accede to the Indian Union. Later he was granted
the acting rank of a Brigadier and appointed Director, MO (OPS). Sam continued in this
assignment till 10th March 1952. During this trying period, Sam had numerous
opportunities to interact with Sardar Vallabh Bhai Patel who was the Home Minister in
the Union Government. The Sardar was constantly in touch with Sam seeking update on
the operations in Kashmir, Hyderabad and so on and in the process both got to know each
other well.
173
8. In 1948, Sam and Thimayya, then a Major General, were a part of the Indian
Delegation to the UN, led by Sir BN Rau, as military advisors. It was here that he first
met Mrs. Indira Gandhi, who was on board the same ship along with her father, Pandit
Jawahar Lal Nehru, the Prime Minister of India, sailing to Paris.
9. In March 1952, Sam was posted to Ferozepur in command of 167 Infantry
Brigade. It was his first command assignment after the war. In 1953, he was appointed
Colonel of the 8th Gorkha Rifles. Having finished with the command of the brigade, Sam
was posted to the Army HQ as "Officiating Director of Military Training" (DMT) from
April 1954 to January 1955. In May 1955, Brigadier Sam Manekshaw was posted as
Commandant to the Infantry School. He was the first Indian to be posted to that
Institution.
10. In November 1956 Sam left for the UK to attend the course at the "Imperial
Defence College" (IDC) till December 1957. On completion of this course and his return
in December 1957, he was posted to command 26 Infantry Division at Jammu. He took
over the Division from Major General PP Kumaramangalam, DSO, who was posted to
the Staff College at Wellington as Commandant. It was here, at Jammu, that a life-long
friendship developed between Sam and Mr DP Dhar, who was then a minister in the State
Cabinet of the State of Jammu & Kashmir. After command of the Division Sam was
posted to the Staff College at Wellington to replace General Kumaramangalam. While
commanding the Staff College, he was cleared for his next rank. Sam was appointed to
command 4 Corps after General Kaul resigned in the walk of the Chinese war.
11. General Manekshaw was appointed GOC-in-C Western Command with it‟s
Headquarters at Simla after the tragic death of Gen Daulat Singh in a helicopter crash in
Poonch in J&K, in November 1963. He assumed command of Western Command on 4th
December 1963, and moved to replace Gen Kumaramangalam in Eastern Command in
1964 yet again. On 8th June 1969, Sam took over as the Chief of Army Staff, once again
from General Kumaramangalam, where apart from other contributions his finest hour was
the surrender of the Pakistan Army in Dacca in 1971. In recognition of his service to the
nation, he was appointed as the first "Field Marshal" in independent India on 1st January
1973.
Highlights of His Career
12. In 1942 at the height of the World War II a fierce battle was raging in Myanmar,
then Burma, at the Sittang Bridge. A company of the Indian Army was engaged in handto-
hand combat with the invading Japanese forces for the capture of a position, which
was critical for the control of the bridge. The young company commander was exhorting
his troops when his stomach was riddled by a machine gun burst. Afraid that his company
would be left leaderless if he were evacuated, he continued fighting till he collapsed. His
company won the day and the general commanding the Indian forces arrived at the scene
to congratulate the soldiers. On seeing the critically wounded commander, he announced
the immediate award of the Military Cross-the young officer was not expected to survive
much longer and the Military Cross is not awarded posthumously. Thus began a historic
military career that spanned the Indo-Pak wars and the Sino-Indian conflict, the wounded
captain surviving to become India's first Field Marshal.
174
13. In 1947 when Pakistan invaded Kashmir, Sam Manekshaw was the Colonel in
charge of operations at the Army Headquarters. His incisive grasp of the situation and his
acumen for planning instantly drew the attention of his superiors and Manekshaw's rise
was spectacular, though not without controversy. He was outspoken and stood by his
convictions. This, coupled with his sense of humour, often got him into trouble with
politicians.
14. In 1961, for instance, he refused to toe the line of the then defence minister V.K.
Krishna Menon and was sidelined. He was vindicated soon after when the Indian army
suffered a humiliating defeat in NEFA the next year, at the hands of the Chinese,
resulting in Menon's resignation. Prime minister Jawaharlal Nehru rushed Manekshaw to
NEFA to command the retreating Indian forces. This had an electrifying effect on the
demoralised officers. In no time, Manekshaw convinced the troops that the Chinese
soldier was not "10 ft tall". His first order of the day characteristically said, "There will
be no withdrawal without written orders and these orders shall never be issued". The
soldiers showed faith in their new commander and successfully checked further ingress
by the Chinese.
15. The Indo-Pak war of 1965 saw Manekshaw as Army Commander, Eastern
Command. When India was forced to launch operations in the West, Manekshaw was
against attacking in the East since the main sufferers would be the people of East
Pakistan. The wisdom of his advice dawned when the Indian forces fought the Pakistan
army in East Pakistan in 1971.
Victory in 1971 War
16. Victory in the 1971 War was Manekshaw's finest hour. As Army Chief and
Chairman, Chiefs of Staff Committee, he planned the operation meticulously refusing to
be coerced by politicians to act prematurely. His strategic and operational finesse was
evident when Indian pincers cut through Pakistani forces like knife through butter,
quickly checkmating them. When the Prime Minister asked him to go to Dacca and
accept the surrender of the Pakistani forces, he declined, magnanimously saying the
honour should go to his Army Commander in the East. He would only go if it were to
accept the surrender of the entire Pakistan Army.
17. Manekshaw's competence, professional standing and public stature was such that
the politician and the bureaucrat alike crossed his path only at their own peril. On one
occasion, he found that the Defence Secretary had penned his own observations on a note
he had written to the Prime Minister and Defence Minister. Infuriated, Manekshaw took
the file and walked straight into Mrs Gandhi's office. He told her that if she found the
Defence Secretary more competent than him to advise her on military matters she did not
have a need for him.
18. As a commander, he was a hard taskmaster. He encouraged his officers in the face
of adversity but did not tolerate incompetence. That is perhaps Manekshaw's greatest
contribution, to instil a sense of duty, efficiency, professionalism in a modern Indian
army and to stand up to political masters and bureaucratic interference.
19. In a way, he was following the path of army chiefs, Gen K.S. Thimayya and Gen
K.M. Cariappa. A humane but strict General, there are many tales of the power of his
whiplash. Following Pakistan's surrender in the east, Manekshaw flew into Calcutta to
175
compliment his officers. The ceremonial reception over at Dum Dum airport, he was
escorted to a car - a Mercedes captured from the enemy. Manekshaw refused to sit in it,
leaving the officers red-faced. On another occasion, a general accused of misusing funds
was marched up to him. "Sir, do you know what you are saying?" asked the general.
"You are accusing a general of being dishonest”. Replied Manekshaw: "Your Chief is not
only accusing you of being dishonest but also calling you a thief. If I were you I would
go home and either shoot myself or resign. I am waiting to see what you will do". The
General submitted his resignation that evening.
20. Land Marks
1914: Born in Amritsar.
1933: Joins the Indian Military Academy.
1934: Commissioned into the army.
1947: Pakistan invades Kashmir. Is Colonel in charge of operations.
1962: Sent to NEFA to check further Chinese intrusion.
1965: Commander, Eastern Command during the Indo-Pak war.
1969: Appointed Chief of the Army staff.
1971: Indo-Pak war. Steers India to victory, and Bangladesh is created.
1973: Given the rank of Field Marshal.
Self Defence
SECTION-1
PRECAUTIONS AND GENERAL BEHAVIOUR OF
BOY AND GIRL CADETS
(JD/JW Cadets Only)
Ques 1 – What precautions should be taken by boys and girl cadets so that their conduct is never
questionable?
(a) Realize their responsibilities and become role model for the youth.
(b) Keep away from drugs, alcohol and tobacco.
(c) Must keep good company.
(d) Develop healthy hobbies like reading, music, painting, gardening etc.
(e) Do not waste your time.
Ques 2 – What should be the general behaviour of NCC cadets?
Ans - It should be as under : -
(a) They should be strictly disciplined, peaceful, friendly and co-operative.
(b) Have a sense of healthy competitiveness and remain free of jealousy
(c) Maintain positive attitude and have mutual respect.
(d) Boys should never indulge in eve teasing.
(e) All must behave elegantly.
Ques 3 – What are the good habits which NCC cadets must imbibe?
(a) Rising early.
(b) Prayers.
(c) Morning exercise/PT.

(d) Cleaning-up and Breakfast.
(e) School/College/ studies(as applicable).
(f) Mid-day meal.
(g) Afternoon short rest /studies.
(h) Evening sports.
(j) Relaxation (watching TV, reading informative books and magazines, newspapers).
(k) Studies.
(l) Dinner.
(m) Cleaning and change.
(n) Adequate sleep at night.
SECTION-2
PREVENTION OF UNTOWARD INCIDENTS
Ques 1 – What are various untoward incidents plaguing the society which must be prevented by cadets?
(a) Road Safety
(b) Pick-pocketing, Hooliganism, Theft and Robbery
(c) Eve-Teasing, Molestation and Sexual – Harassment
(d) Smoking and Alcoholism.
Ques 2 - How to avert road accidents?
Ans - (a) walk carefully on the roads.
(b) Follow all safety rules.
(c) Take into account all signals.
(d) Start early to reach in time.
(e) Do not over-speed.
(f) Do not mix drinking and driving.
(g) Cross roads at zebra-crossing.
(h) Where there is no zebra crossing, one should look towards both sides and then cross.
(j) Hold children‟s hands, when they are going to cross roads.
(k) Children must be taught all the road safety rules.
Ques 3 - How to prevent Pick-pocketing, Hooliganism, Theft and Robbery?
Ans - Following measures must be taken: -
(a) To prevent pick-pocketing, one should avoid travelling in crowded places, and should try to carry
little cash and valuables.
(b) Cadets should not indulge in hooliganism.
(c) If cadets see hooligans indulging in such activities, and if it is a small and manageable group and
cadets are in a large number, they can try for a peaceful dispersion.
(d) If the incident cannot be controlled, cadets should report the same to nearest police-station or to
any law & order authority.
(e) Cadets must ensure prevention of robbery & theft and report any such incidents to law and order
authority.
(f) Cadets must make good contribution in prevention of such incidents in their neighbourhood.
Ques 4 – How to discourage Eve -Teasing, Molestation and Sexual - Harassment ?
Ans -
(a) Cadets must abide by moral values right from young age.
(b) They must learn to respect dignity of opposite sex.
(c) Girls should dress up elegantly so that they don‟t attract indecent remarks.
(d) Girls should avoid travelling alone in darkness.
(e) Work together with the opposite sex in a healthy environment.
(f) Boy cadets must understand that eve-teasing, molestation and sexual harassment are criminal
offences.
Ques 5 - How to discourage Drugs, Smoking and Alcoholism?
Ans - It must be ensured that: -
(a) Cadets should spend time with their families and should introduce their friends to them
(b) Cadets must understand that drug addiction, smoking and alcoholism are health hazards, and
social evils and these are to be avoided.
(c) Cadets must spread awareness and positive thinking in the society.
(d) Cadets must remember that laws are implemented severely to penalize those found guilty of
selling drugs or encouraging people to take drugs.
SECTION-3
VULNERABLE PART OF BODY
Ques 1- What are the vulnerable parts of the body?
Ans - Eyes, ears, temples, nose, mouth, chin, front and sides of throat, solar plexus, abdomen, fork (testicles),
knees and insteps. Base of skull, spine (specially cervical and Lumber regions), kidneys, coccyx or testicles.
SECTION-4
PHYSICAL SELF DEFENCE/UAC
Ques 1 – What are the essential principles of unarmed combat?
Ans - (a) Ruthlessness
(b) Determined effort
(c) Attack vulnerable parts of opponent.
(d) Efficiency of initial attack.
(e) Surprise and speed of attack.
(f) Retaining initiative.
Introduction to infantry weapons and Equipment

SECTION-1
CHARACTERISTICS OF 7.62MM SLR, AMN, FIREPOWER,
STRIPPING, ASSEMBLING AND CLEANING
Ques 1 - Rif 7.62 mm SLR ka kutar (celibre) kitna hai?
Ans - 7.62 mm
Ques 2 - Bharey huey magazine ke sath Rif 7.62 mm SLR ka wazan kitna hai?
Ans - 5.1 Kg
Ques 3 - Rif 7.62 mm SLR ka kargar range kitna hai?
Ans - 275 meters
Ques 4 - Rif 7.62 mm SLR men kitne round bharey jaatey hain?
Ans - 20 Rds.
Ques 5 - Rif 7.62 mm SLR ka poora naam likho?
Ans - 7.62mm self loading rifle.
Ques 6 - Rif 7.62 mm SLR ke sath ek minute main kitne round fire kar saktey hain?
Ans - 05 Rds
Ques 7 - Rif 7.62 mm SLR ka safai ka saman likho?
Ans - (i) Pull through.
(ii) Oil bottle.
(iii) Combination tool.
(iv) Gas regulator key screw driver.
(v) Cylinder/Chamber cleaning brush.
(vi) Rifle cleaning brush.
(vii) Graphite grease tube.
(viii) Chindi.
SECTION-2
SLR : FILLING, EMPTYING OF MAGAZINE, SIGHT SETTING,
LYING POSITION, HOLDING, AIMING AND FIRING
Ques 1. Rif 7.62 mm SLR ka magazine kitne parkar se bhara jaata hai?
Ans - Do parkar se.
Ques 2. Rif 7.62 mm SLR ki sight par kon kon se ank khude huey hote hain?
Ans - 3 to 6.
Ques 3. Ready position par trigger ki position kahan hoti hai?
Ans - 'R' par.
Ques 4. Rif 7.62 mm SLR se kaun kaun parkar ke fire kiye jaate hain?
Ans - (a) Deliberate.
(b) Snap shooting.
(c) Rapid fire
SECTION-3
CHARACTERISTICS OF 5.56MM INSAS RIF, AMMUNITION , FIREPOWER, STRIPPING, ASSEMBLING AND
CLEANING
Ques1. 5.56 mm Rifle ka poora naam likho?
Ans - Rifle 5.56 mm Indian Small Arms System hai.
Ques 2 - Rifle 5.56 mm ka kuta (celibre) likho?
Ans - 5.56 mm.
Ques 3 - Rifle 5.56 mm ka wazan likho?
Ans - 3.6 Kg.
Ques 4 - Rifle 5.56 mm ka kargar range likho?
Ans - 400 meters.
Ques 5 - Rifle 5.56 mm ka rate of fire likho?
Ans - (a) Normal - 60 rds/min.
(b) TRB (Three Round Burst) - 90 rds/min.
(c) Intense - 150 rds /min.
(d) Cyclic - 600 to 650 rds/min.
SECTION-4
CHARACTERISTICS OF 7.62MM LIGHT MACHINE GUN (LMG)
AMMUNITION, FIREPOWER, STRIPPING, ASSEMBLING AND CLEANING
Ques 1. 7.62 mm LMG ka poora naam lokho?
Ans - 7.62 mm Light Machine Gun.
Ques 2. 7.62 mm LMG ka rate of fire lokho?
Ans - (a) Normal - 28 rds (One mag) per min.
(b) Rapid - 112 rds (four mag) per min.
(c) Cyclic - 450 - 500 rds per min.
Ques 3. 7.62 mm LMG ka kargar range lokho?
Ans (a) On bipod - 500 yds.
(b) On tripod - 1000 yds.
Ques 4. 7.62 mm LMG ke magazine mein kitne roud attey hain?
Ans - 30 Rds
Ques 5. 7.62 mm LMG kis sidhant ar kaam karti hai?
Ans - Gas
Ques 6. 7.62 mm LMG ke change leaver ki kitnee position hoti hai?
Ans - 3.
SECTION-5
TECHNICAL DATA OF INFANTRY WEAPONS
Ques 1- 84 RLka kutar kitna hota hai?
Ans - 84 mm
Ques 2 - 84 mm RL ka wazan likho?
Ans - 16.100 Kg
Ques 3 - 84 mm RL se kitne parkar ka ammunition fire kar sakte hain?
Ans. 06 parkar ka.
Ques 4 - 81 mm Mor se kitne parkar ka ammunition fire kar sakte hain?
Ans - Three.
Ques 5. Hand Grenade No 36 ka killing area kitna hai?
Ans - 8 Mtr raidus.
Ques 6 - Hand grenade No-36 ka fuze kitne second ka hota hai?
Ans - 4 second ka.
Ques 7 - 7.62 mm machine Gun ka rate of fire likho?
Ans - (a) Normal - 100 rounds per minute.
(b) Rapid - 200 rounds per minute.
(c) Cyclic - 600-1000 rounds per minute.
Home Nursing
SECTION -1
INTRODUCTION TO HOME NURSING
Ques 1. What are the qualities of a good nurse?
Ans - A good nurse must possess the following qualities:-
(a) Honesty and Truthfulness. A nurse should be honest to her profession. She should confess her mistake and not risk the life of
the patient by hiding it.
(b) Sympathy and Understanding. A good nurse should deal with the patient with understanding and compassion. She must
appreciate the pain and suffering of the patient.
(c ) Cheerfulness, Gentleness and Willingness. A cheerful nurse reduces the sufferings of the patients to half. Her gentleness
reduces their pain and discomfort. "A warm smile may be more therapeutic than a dose of medicine•".
(d) Obedience and Discipline. A nurse should have self discipline and should obey the orders of the doctor and carry them out
without argument.
(e) Observant. A Nurse should observe the minutest details of the patient's condition. If
there is the slightest change in the patientâ€™s condition, she should immediately report it
to the Doctor.
(f) Tact and Sense of Humour. A tactful nurse can deal easily with the irritable patients. Her sense of humour helps her to bear the
hardships of profession cheerfully.
SECTION -2
THE ROLLER BANDAGE AND ITS APPLICATION
Ques 1. What are the sizes of various bandages?
Ans - (a) Bandage for Finger - 1'• wide
(b) Bandage for Head and Arm - 2½'•
(c ) Bandage for Trunk - 6'•
(d) Bandage for Leg - 3 ½'•
Ques 2. What are the general rules of bandages?
Ans (a) Face the causality.
(b) Hold the head of the bandage in the right hand.
(c ) Apply the outer side of the free end to the part and where possible lock it in position by a superimposed turn.
(d) Bandage firmly from below upwards and from within outwards over the front of the limb.
(e) Apply the layer of the bandage so that it covers neither too tight nor too loose.
(f) When completed secure the bandage by a safety pin or adhesive strapping.
SECTION -3
THE SICK ROOM: PREPARATION, CLEANING,
LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
Ques 1. What points should be borne in mind while cleaning the sick room?
Ans (a) All cleaning work should be done without disturbing the patient after the toilet is over and
the bed remade.
(b) Light furniture should be removed before the room is swept and dusted. After dusting,
each piece should be wiped with a weak solution of disinfectant and then polished with dry
cloth.
(c ) Dusting should be done with a damp cloth. The floor should be cleaned after scattering
damp tea leaves so that dust does not rise.
(d) At night, flowers should be removed from the vases and fresh flowers arranged in the
morning.
Ques 2 Define Sick Room?
ANS: The sick room should be that room of the house which is away from all noise and through which there is no passage. However, it should
have a bathroom and lavatory close by. It should face South or South-West.
Ques 3 Define Sick Room?
Ans (a) Preparation
(b) Cleaning
(c) Lighting
(d) Ventilation
(e) Cross Ventilation
(f) Wide Streets with Open Spacing.
(g) Cleaning of Air Through Trees
(h) Effects of Heat
SECTION -4
PULSE , RESPIRATION AND TEMPERATURE
TAKING AND RECORDING
Ques 1. Define respiration?
Ans - The inhalation and exhalation of a person is called respiration
Ques 2. What is the pulse rate of various ages?
Ans (a) Infants 30-40 per minutes.
(b) Children 24-28 per minute.
(c ) Adults 15-20 per minute.
Ques 3. Define body temperature?
Ans Temperature. The normal temperature of a man is between 97° and 99° F. There is slight
½ ° F variation between the daily temperature in the morning and evening. The lowest temperature is between 2 AM and 4 AM.
Ques 4. What is the method of taking temperature?
Ans - Keep the bulb of the thermometer pressed under the armpit or beneath the tongue or in the groin for 2 minutes.
Ques 5. Define pulse?
Ans - The pulse is the heart beat and is most commonly felt at the radial on the point of the wrist. The average pulse rate is 72 beats per
minute. In case of infants, is 100 to 140 beats per minute and in case of children 90 to 100 beats per minute.
SECTION -5
OBSERVATION OF THE SICK: SIGNS AND
SYMPTOMS TO BE NOTED
Ques 1. What important points should be observed in a patient for proper treatment?
Ans - These are as under: -
(a) Appearance of the Patient
(i) The colour of the skin whether pale, flushed blue or yellow.
(ii) Whether moist or dry, hot or cold, smooth or rough, covered with rashes,
bruises or discolored.
(iii) If any swelling or edema.
(iv) If pain, its place and duration.
(v) Facial expression and other signs of discomfort.
(b) Temperature, Pulse and Respiration. Take temperature, pulse and respiration twice a day or four times a day or eight time a
day, as desired by the doctor and maintain TPR Chart.
(c) Stools
(i) Frequency and whether it shows constipation or diarrhoea condition.
(ii) Colour
(aa) Normal brown.
(ab) Clay coloured which shows obstructive jaundice.
(ac) Black shiny which shows bleeding from the stomach or duodenum.
(ad) Full black which shows effect of medicines like iron.
(iii) Composition. Presence of abnormal material as blood, pus, gall stones, worms, undigested food. Specimen of stool is to
be left for the doctor to see in a well covered stool box.
(d) Urine. In case of urine the following should be observed:-
(i) Frequency. Increased frequency is due to inflammation of the bladder.
(ii) Quantity
(aa) Urine output is reduced in fever, in conditions of dehydration and in a acute nephritis.
(ab) Urine quantity is increased in case of diabetes and inflammation of the kidneys.
(iii) Colour Abnormalities
(aa) Red - Due to presence of a lot of blood.
(ab) Dark Greenish Brown- Due to presence of bile.
(ac) Smoky - Due to some blood being present.
(ad) Orange, Green or Blue - Due to presence of some drugs.
(iv) Deposits. If the urine is allowed to stand, the following may be observed:-
(aa) A sandy deposit white or pink.
(ab) A whitish cloud showing mucous.
(ac) A thick greenish deposit due to pus.
(Early morning specimen should be kept in a clear, covered , glass bottle).
(e) Cough and Sputum. Report on it must state:-
(i) Amount.
(ii) Colour.
(iii) Whether expectorated easily or with difficulty.
(f) Vomit
(a) Quantity.
(b) Time in relation to food.
(c) Whether it causes pain or relieves it.
(d) Material vomited such as blood.
SECTION -6
FEEDING A HELPLESS PATIENT
Ques 1. What are the important precautions to be taken while feeding a helpless patient with fluid diet?
Ans. (a) The mouth of the patient should be washed and wiped.
(b) If the patient can sit up, the fluid can be given in a cup or in a glass.
(c) If the patient wants to take fruit juice with a straw he/she should be provided that.
(d) If the patient can not sit up, he/she should be fed with a feeding cup or a feeder.
(e) The bed clothes should be protected by placing a clean napkin beneath the patient's mouth.
(f) The nurse should place her left arm, under the first pillow to raise the patient's head slightly.
(g) The flow of the fluid should be regulated so that too much of it does not flow into the patient's mouth.
(h) One mouthful should be given at one time pausing to allow her time for chewing. Feeding can be done with a tea spoon also.
(j) In case of jaw injuries, a small rubber tube is attached to the spout of the feeding cup and then put between the teeth.
(k) The patient should be given small quantity to swallow at one time.
(l) After feeding the patient, lips should be wiped with a clean towel.
Ques 2. What are the important precautions to be taken while feeding a helpless patient with solid food?
Ans (a) Food should be served in an attractive manner arranged attractively on a side table.
(b) One dish should be brought at one time.
(c) The food should be served hot. It should be put in a plate in the kitchen before bringing
to the patient.
(d) Patient should be fed with a spoon.
(e) As soon as food is finished the plate should be removed.
SECTION-7
MEDICINES AND THEIR ADMINISTRATION
Ques 1. What precautions should be taken while administering the liquid medicines to patient?
Ans - (a) Check the label with the prescription. If handling a new medicine read the instructions carefully.
(b) Shake the medicine well.
(c) Put your thumb near the correct marking of dosage on the medicine glass. Hold the glass in level with the medicine bottle. Pour
away from the label so that it does not become illegible. Replace the cork immediately.
(d) Read the instructions once again before actually giving the medicine to the patient.
(e) Take the medicine on a tray with a glass of water and spoon in case the medicine requires stirring. If the medicine has a bitter
taste, give the patient some sweet drink.
(f) Put the medicine bottle in the correct place.
(g) Never pour back any unused medicine, throw it away.
Ques 2. What precautions should be taken while administering the other medicines to patient?
Ans (a) In case of pills, tablets, capsules and powder, remember that a pill has a sugar coating and a capsule has a gelatine
coating and hence can be easily swallowed with water.
(b) Tablets if not swallowed by the patient may be crushed and put on the back of the tongue for swallowing.
(c) Powder must be poured at the back of the patientâ€™s tongue and water poured in his mouth.
(d) Iron mixture should be given with straws so that the teeth are not stained. (e) If the patient is not too weak, he/she should be asked
to clean his/her teeth.
SECTION -8
FEVER, INFECTION, DISINFECTION AND
SPECIFIC INFECTIOUS DISEASES
Ques 1. What is fever?
Ans - Whenever there is an inroad of disease germs in the body, due to some infection, it raises its temperature to put up a fight against the
invasion. The state of more than normal temperature is called 'Fever'.
Ques 2. What are various names of fevers considering the temperature?
Ans (a) The normal temperature of the body is 97° F to 99° F.
(b) The temperature above 99° causes pain, restlessness, headache and body ache.
(c) Moderate temperature from 99° F to 103° F is called Pyrexia.
(d) High temperature from 103° F to 105° F is called High Pyrexia.
(e) Very high temperature over 105° F is called Hyper -Pyrexia.
Ques 3. What are various types of fevers as per severity?
Ans (a) Constant. In this the temperature remains the same all the 24 hours as
in pneumonia and scarlet fever.
(b) Intermittent. The temperature rises very high and falls very low. It appears when there
is severe infection.
(c) Remittent Fever. This is a very high fever. It rises more than 1° during 24 hours. It is
found in case of tuberculosis and sepsis.
(d) Irregular. It has no set pattern of rise and fall of temperature.
Ques 4. Define infection?
ANS: The spreading of germs of a disease from a sick person to a healthy person is called infection.
Ques 5 - What are the media of infection?
ANS: (a) Through Air. Disease germs spread from a sick person to a healthy person when the sick person breathes out foul germs
and fit person inhales it. The germs are harboured by the healthy person till they multiply and become strong enough to show
symptoms of the disease. Diseases like tuberculosis and influenza spread in this manner.
(b) Through Water. Water gets contaminated when patients of a disease wash into it their faeces, urine, sputum and vomit. These
germs are carried by rivers and streams and sink into wells, ponds and lakes. When this water is used by healthy persons for washing
and drinking, the germs remain dormant in his body till his resistance becomes poor and he falls victim to diseases. Cholera, enteric
fever, dysentery, typhoid and jaundice spread in this manner.
(c ) Through Insects. Germs of various diseases are carried by insects. The anopheline female mosquito, house fly, sand fly, fleas,
ticks all act as carriers of disease. The mosquito, sand fly, fleas and ticks bite a patient, take the germs of the diseases in their blood,
harbour them till they find a healthy man to bite and pass on the germs into his blood, till after a period, the healthy person also starts
showing signs of the disease. Malaria, plague and sand fly fever, all spread like this. Cholera, diarrhoea, dysentery, jaundice, typhoid
spread in this manner.
Ques 6 - Define disinfection?
ANS: It means destroying the disease germs through various methods. It is to break the chain of infection.
Ques 7 : what are the physical and the chemical agents of disinfection?
ANS:
(a) Physical Agents
(i) Light.
(ii) Heat - both dry and moist.
(b) Chemical Agents
(i) Gases.
(ii) Liquids.
(iii) Solids.
SECTION - 9
OPERATION: AFTER CARE, DRESSING OF WOUNDS
Ques 1 - Discuss some of the points while dressing the wound of the patient?
Ans - The following should be done to help in quick healing of wounds and keep them from turning septic:-
(a) The hand should be properly washed.
(b) Everything that is used while dressing the wound should be properly sterilized so that he wound does not get infected
(C) Soiled dressing should be thrown properly in a covered waste bin and not allowed
(d) The wound should be cleaned with proper solutions
(e) Fresh air and sunshine assist in the quick recovery of a patient
(f) There should be no obstruction to the free circulation of blood so that the healing process is not restricted
(g) Proper diet should be given to the patient. Sufficient quantity of vitamin C must be
ensured for quick healing.
(h) The patient should be made to feel fit and kept cheerful.
SECTION -10
POISONS AND FIRST AID
Ques 1 What is poison ?
ANS: Any substance which, if taken in large quantity causes damage to the human system or may cause death, is called poison.
Ques 2 What are the means of poison intake?
ANS: (a) Poisons can be swallowed by eating or drinking.
(b) Poisons enter the system by breathing in the form of fumes or smoke.
(c ) Poisons enter the body through injections or through bites such as snakes or rabid dogs.
Ques 3 : What are the types of poison?
ANS: (a) Corrosive
(b) Irritants
(c) Stimulants
(d) Depressors.
Ques 4: What is the first aid for the patient who has consumed poison?
ANS: (a) Arrange to remove the patient to hospital immediately.
(b) Note down the name of the poison if the empty bottle is there. Preserve if there is any remaining portion of the poison.
(c ) Keep in some container any vomited matter, if it is there.
(d) If the patient has not taken any corrosive matter induce vomiting.
(e) If he is unconscious lay him with head turned to one side keeping his tongue out. If his respiration is failing, give artificial
respiration.
(f) If the patient is conscious and the poison which he has taken is known, the following steps may be taken:-
(i) If he has taken some acid give him some alkali such as chalk, milk of magnesia
and baking soda water.
(ii) If it is alkali give him 2 table spoonful of vinegar or lime juice water. Make the patient drink plenty of water or give
something to drink such as milk or barley water or raw eggs.
(iii) If the patient has taken some disinfectant like cresol, carbolic acid or sleeping tablets like luminal, give two table spoonful
of common salt with water or raw eggs.
(iv) In case of opium and morphia poisoning, give a few crystals of potassium permanganate in a tumbler of water and make
the patient vomit.
(v) If there is gas poisoning, move casualty out of the room having gas. If the breathing is obstructed give artificial respiration.
The domestic antidote for poisoning is a mixture of tea powder or burnt toast and milk of magnesia mixed in equal portion.
Communication
SECTION-1
IMPORTANCE OF COMMUNICATION IN ARMY
Ques 1. Why is efficient signal communication important for the Defence Forces?
Ans - (a) Communicating between deployed troops and commanders.
(b) Convey the details of enemy troop movements and their activities.
(c) To change the mode of battle activities.
(d) To implement emergency instruction in battle field.
(e) To convey specific orders in terrain and snow bound area.
(f) For effective operational changes in battle field.
(g) To acquire and decipher the information and misinformation of enemy.
(h) To prepare the troops for further operational activities.
(j) To assess grounds level effect of operational activities.
(k) To improve infrastructure facilities in battle field.
(l) To carry out secure and effective communications with precaution and privacy.
(m) Communication supply of food and evacuation of casualties.
SECTION-2
METHOD OF COMMUNICATION
Ques 1. What are the various methods of communication?
Ans - (a) Sign Language
(b) Voice Medium
(c) Written script
(d) Runners and message bearers
(e) Line and cable
(f) Wireless
SECTION-3
TYPES OF COMMUNICATIONS,
ADVANTAGES/DISADVANTAGES
Ques 1. What are the advantages and disadvantages of Line communication?
Advantages
(a) Reliable and practically free from electrical interference.
(b) Relatively secure.
(c ) Number of circuits and message carrying capacity is more but limited only by
availability of material and manpower.
Disadvantages
(a) Vulnerable to physical interference and enemy interception along the entire length
of the route.
(b) Takes time to construct.
(c ) Inflexible once it is laid.
(d) Expensive in men and material.
Ques 2 - What are the advantages and disadvantages of Net Radio?
Ans - Advantages.
(a) Is vulnerable only at terminal and is therefore reasonably protected from enemy
action except by a direct hit.
(b) Is very flexible, can be rapidly re-arranged in the event of regrouping.
(c ) Is rapid in establishing communication.
(d) Can work on the move although range obtained will be much less than
when stationary.
(e) Is economical in personnel and equipment.
Disadvantages
(a) Is inherently insecure and susceptible to enemy interception which necessitates
the use of codes and ciphers with a consequent delay in clearing traffic and
overall increase in operating personnel.
(b) Net radio being inherently insecure demands a considerable degree of security consciousness on the part of the users. This means
adherence to standard procedure and security codes.
Ques 3. What are the advantages and disadvantages of Radio Relay?
Ans - Advantages
(a) Replace line with considerable economy of manpower and stores.
(b) It can be operated over area where for reasons of ground or enemy activity use of line
may not be possible.
(c ) Provides greater flexibility than line.
(d) Quick to set up and move except in mountainous country.
(e) Is vulnerable physically only at terminal.
(f) By its ability to employ multichannel equipment radio relay provides more teleprinter circuits over one link than can
normally be provided over the average field cable. Thus it has much greater traffic handling capacity.
Disadvantage
(a) Liable to interception and hence insecure. Has relatively greater security than netradio, depending upon the siting and direction of the beams.
(b) Liable to interference from enemy jamming although not as much as in the case ofnet radio.
(c) Terrain between stations must be reasonable suitable to get a â€˜quasi optical pathâ€™, this presents difficulty in siting.
(d) Location of terminal and intermediate stations may not suit tactical layout and may,therefore, create additional protection requirements.
(e) Can not work on the move.
(f) Slightly more expensive in men and material than in the case of net radio.
(g) Needs critical siting.
SECTION-4
COMMUNICATION MEDIA
Ques 1 - What are the various transmission lines?
Ans - (a) Parallel Wire type
(b) Coaxial type
(c ) Wave Guide type
Ques 2. What are the various types of propagation of waves and explain each in brief?
Ans - (a) Ground Wave Propagation. Used for long and medium waves, limited range is
30 Kms.
(b) Sky Wave Propagation. Used for HF range up to 30 MHz communication, range is 100 km to 1000 Kms. These make use of ionosphere
layer existing to a height of 150 -200 kms from the surface of earth.
(c ) Space Wave Propagation. The propagation of VHF and UHF frequency takes place
in straight lines. The range is limited by curvature of earth and so distance between two
neighboring station is approx 50 Kms.
(d) Tropospheric Scatter Propagation. Also known as tropo scatter or fwd scatter
propagation, extended height up to 8-10 Kms from the surface of earth.
SECTION-5
RS ANPRC-25
Ques 1. What are the special feature and facilities available in Radio Set ANPRC-25?
Ans - (a) It is a portable set.
(b) It has RT communication facilities.
(c) Can be used on ground and man pack.
(d) Facilities of remote operating and re- broadcasting is available.
(e) Power supply can be increased with booster unit to increase the communication range.
(f) Protection from Heat and Moisture.
(g) VHF is pre-tuned.
(h) Suitable for Para Dropping.
(j) Compatible with RS VA and VA Mk II and VC.
(k) Range will be doubled when it is used with GPA.
(l) Can be used in all type of geographical areas.
Ques 2. What is the weight and frequency range of Radio set ANPRC -25?
Ans - (a) Weight
(i) Radio Set - 6.10 Kg.
(ii) Battery - 1.60 Kg.
(iii) Accessories - 3.08 Kg.
(iv) Complete Station - 10.78 Kg.
(b) Frequency Range
(i) Frequency range of this set is 30 MHz to 75.95 MHz which is fixed with twobands.
(aa) Band I - 30 MHz to 52.95 MHz
(ab) Band II - 53 MHz to 75.95 MHz
(ii) Its frequency range is connected with 920 channels. Channel spacing from one channel to another channel is 50 KHz.
Ques 3. What is communication range and power supply of Radio set ANPRC -25?
Ans - (a) Communication Range
(i) With antenna AT 892 - 8 Km.
(ii) With Antenna AT 271 - 8 Km.
(iii) With booster Unit - 25 Km
(iv) With GPA with Booster - Range becomes double.
(b) Power Supply Consumption
Battery Dry HT/LT 15/3 V IA. Life of this battery is in the ratio of 1:9 for 20 hrs, in which transmission can be done for one hour and message can
be receive for 9 hrs.
SECTION -6
CHARACTERISTIC OF WALKIE TALKIE
RADIO SET GP 338 MOTOROLA
Ques 1 - What are the facilities available in RADIO SET GP 338 MOTOROLA?
Ans - (a) It is portable and light in weight.
(b) Can be operated easily.
(c) It can be operated in VHF/UHF and 2 way simplex mode.
(d) 128 channel of this radio set can be preset into 8 zone.
(e) 16 channels can be preset into single zone.
(f) Frequency of this radio set can be programmed in 25 KHz channel space with therange
of 12.5 to 20 KHz.
(g) Option of selective call facilities available.
(h) Call alert can be given to receiver station.
(j) Can select required zone.
(k) Start/stop facilities of scan operation available.
(l) Add/Delete from scan list facilities available.
(m) Menu key facilities are available.
(n) Provision of receiving signal strength indicator (RSSI) are available.
(o) Provision of name/Tone Tagging facility available.
(p) Provision of talk around indicator facility available.
(q) Provision of 14 character Alfa numerical display LCD facility available.
(r) Provision of clock/reminder alarm facility available.
(s) Audible alert tone indicator is provided.
(t) Seven programmable buttons are provided.
(u) Facility of emergency siren top button is provided.
(v) Battery gauge indicator facility is provided.
(w) Accessory connectors is provided with radio set.
(x) Provision of DTMF key pad ( Duel Tone Mute Freq).
(y) Clock and alarm is provided.
(z) Time out timer facility is provided.
(aa) Provision of battery saver.
(ab) Power level can be adjusted.
(ac) Provision of MDC-1200 signalling encode/decode (Motorola digital code).
Ques 2. What is the weight and frequency range of Radio Set GP 338 Motorola?
Ans - (a) Weight and Measure
(i) Weight and measure of this radio set is as follows:-
(ii) Dimension with NI MH high cap battery - 137 x 57.5 x 37.5 mm.
(iii ) Wight with NI MH high cap battery - 420 gms.
(b) Frequency Range Frequency of this radio set is as under:-
(i) 136 MHz to 174 MHz on VHF mode.
(ii) 403 MHz to 470 MHz on UHF mode.
Ques 3. What is the communication range and name of power supply of Radio Set GP 338 Motorola?
Ans - (a) Communication Range Communication range of this radio set is 4 to 5 Km and 20 to 40 Km with repeater.
(b) Power Supply Power supply can be provided to this radio set by the followingbatteries.
(i) Ni MH high cap 7.2 volt.
(ii) Ni MH ultra high cap 7.2 volt.
(iii) Ni Cd High cap FM 7.2 volt.
(iv) Ni Cd High cap 7.2 volt.
(v) Lithium 7.2 volt.
SECTION -7
LINE COMMUNICATION
Ques 1. What are the basic functions of telephone sets 'L', 'F', 'J', 'EE', '8B'?
Ans - (a) It works on magneto signalling.
(b) Calling is done by magneto.
(c) CB calling and clearing is done.
(d) It provides speech communication.
(e) It works in all weather conditions
Ques 2. What are the facilities if Switch Board Telephone 15 Lines?
Ans - (a) 15 Lines can be provided.
(b) Can work with either magneto, CB, CBS or auto exchanges.
(c ) Has got both internal and external ringer.
(d) Two exchanges can be linked up to provide 30 line facility.
(e) A lamp indicator has been provided to warn the operator about an in coming call.
(f) A ringing visual indicator has been provided.
(g) Facility exists for night alarm.
(h) Apart from the dry battery, power source can be provided by secondary battery also.
(j) Lighting facility for the switch board is provided by means of specially designed lighting unit.
Ques 3. What are the advantages and functions of Telephone Set 5A/5B?
Ans - The telephone set Field 5A/5B has the following functions and advantages:-
(a) Facility exists for installing a autodial and hooking with an auto exchange.
(b) Facility for line test exists.
(c ) A device has been installed in the micro phone for noise cancellation.
(d) In H position the range of the telephone is increased considerably.
(e) Facility exists on the both 5 A/5 B for remote operating.
(f) Made of superior magneto and can function with CB/CBS exchanges.
Ques 4 - What is the [power supply and consumption of the Telephone Set 5A/5B?
Ans - It is powered by 2 X 1.5 Volt No 3 cells or 3 V external batteries and the power consumption of set 5 A is 20 mA and set 5 B is 15 mA. It
can receive and sent signal waves with a bell due to generator
Ques 5 -What is the main difference between Telephone set 5 A and 5 B?
Ans - Telephone Set 5 A Telephone Set 5 B
(a) Small in size Large in size
(b) Light in weight Heavier
(c) Auto call can be attached Auto call can not be attached
(d) Bell is tubular type Bell is Gong type
(e) CB Loop resistance is 200, 250, 300. CB Loop resistance is from 200 to 350
(f) TRL switch exists TRL switch does not exists
(g) Threaded type of line terminal Push type line terminal
Ques 5 - What are the important phrases used while operating the exchange?
Ans - (a) 'Number please , Sir'•.
(b) 'You want number______, Sir'•.
(c ) 'Sorry , Sir Number is engaged , Sir'•.
(d) 'I will ring you back , Sir'•.
(e) 'Call for you from_______'Speak up, please'•.
(f) 'Have you finished . Sir'.
SECTION -8
LATEST TRENDS AND DEVELOPMENTS
Ques 1. What are the latest trends in communication?
(a) Tropo-scatter
(b) Modem
(c) Fax
(d) Telex
(e) Satellite
(f) Optic fiber communications
(g) Computer system
(h) Internet
(i) Cell phone
(j) Multimedia
(k) Videophone
Ques 2 - Name various types of satellites?
Ans - (a) Weather Satellite.
(b) Scientific Satellite.
(c ) Communication Satellite.
(d) Navigational Satellite
(e) Military Satellite.
Ques 3. What are the advantages and disadvantages of optic fiber communication?
Ans. (a) Advantages
(i) It has wide band width carrying different types of info from low speed voice
signal to high speed computer data.
(ii) Less power requirement.
(iii) Small cable size.
(iv) No repeater station required.
(v) No electromagnetic interference.
(b) Disadvantages
(i) Jointing problem.
(ii) Channel dropping not possible.
(iii) More expensive.
Ques 4 - What are the advantages and disadvantages of Computer system?
Ans - (a) Advantages
(i) Speed of process and calculations.
(ii) Accuracy of process and calculation once the programme is proved.
(iii) Persistence - It will continue on the same job until the end, always working inthe same way, each and every day.
(iv) Mass storage of data.
(v) The ability to handle large volume of data.
(b) Disadvantages
(i) Data loss if machine malfunctions.
(ii) Back up hard data still required to be maintained.
(iii) Constant power source is required.
Ques 5. What are the advantages of cell phone?
Ans - (a) More subscriber and traffic capability.
(b) No perceptible difference between mobile and fixed subscribers.
(c ) Better quality of service.
(d) Miniaturization using very large scale integration (VLSI ) technology which enables ever decreasing size and weight of the hand set.
(e) Higher speed of data exchange.
(f) Can be used in an integrated mode with computer network.
Field Engineering
SECTION-1
INTRODUCTION TO FIELD ENGINEERING
Ques 1- Define Field engineering?
Ans - Field engineering is the study of field fortification, obstacle planning including minefields,mine warfare, and stores and equipment
relating to the same.
Ques 2. What are the various tasks performed by Field Engineers?
Ans - (a) Laying of mine fields.
(b) Breaching of mine fields.
(c) Construction of field defences.
(d) Construction of tracks in mountains.
(e) Construction / maintenance of border roads.
(f) Water supply to troops in the field, especially in deserts.
(g) Construction of Helipads where-ever required.
(h) In Counter Insurgency Operation:-
(i) Detection, neutralisation and removal of IEDs and explosives.
(ii) Road opening etc for all type of traffic.
(j) Maintenance of essential services.
SECTION-2
KNOTS AND LASHINGS
Ques 1 - What is the purpose of Knots?
Ans - Knots, bends and hitches are used to join two lashings together, to form a loop in a lashing, to make a stop on a lashing or to secure a
lashing to a spar, or to make a hook.
Ques 2. What is the characteristics of Knots?
Ans - (a) Knot should be strong so that it does not open due to pull and pressure.
(b) Knot should be in conformity to work and simple to use.
(c) Knots should be opened easily.
Ques 3. What are the various types of lashes?
Ans - (a) Square Lashes
(b) Diagonal lashes
(c) Parallel lashes
SECTION-3
TYPES OF MINES
Ques 1. What is mine?
Ans - A mine is a weapon to be used with cunning and with the constant aim of catching the enemy unawares.
Ques 2- What are the various types of mines?
Ans (a) Anti Tank Mines. Mines designed primarily against tanks are called anti tank mines.
(b) Anti Personnel Mines. Mines designed primarily against personnel are called anti personnel mines. They are further classified as
follows:-
(aa) Blast type.
(ab) Fragmentation type.
(c) Toxic Chemical Mines. Mines used to contaminate areas. The toxic agent of each mine is dispersed by burster charges.
SECTION-4
TYPES OF OBSTACLES
Ques 1. What is the purpose of obstacle?
Ans - (a) Delaying and disorganizing him under fire.
(b) Restricting his power of manoeuvre thereby canalizing him into a pre-selected killingground.
(c) Disorganizing his plan of attack.
(d) Making him waste time, labour and equipment in forcing a passage.
(e) Denying him the opportunity of achieving surprise.
(f) Lowering his morale.
Ques 2. What are essential characteristics of obstacles?
Ans - (a) Must be strong and of sufficient depth to impose maximum delay to enemy.
(b) Sited to fit in with coordinated plan; covered by fire and concealed to achieve surprise.
(c) Constructed outside the hand grenade range.
(d) It must not
(i) Obscure the fire or observation of the defender,
(ii) Afford cover to enemy ,
(iii) Reveal the exact position of the defence,
(iv) Hinder the mobility of the defender
(v) Permit the enemy reconnaissance without interference by the defender.
Ques 3. What are the various types of infantry obstacles?
Ans - (a) Artificial Obstacles.
(i) Wire obstacles.
(ii) Anti-personnel minefields.
(iii) Thorn fences.
(iv) Panji fields.
(v) Walls.
(vi) Ditches with or without water.
(b) Natural Obstacles.
(i) Marshes.
(ii) Rivers, nullahs and canals.
(iii) Unscalabe cliffs, escarpments and steep slopes.
(iv) Dense growth like tea or rhodendrous bushes.
Ques 4. What are the various types of vehicles and anti tank obstacles?
Ans - (a) Anti-tank Minefields. These are dealt with in details in section dealing with 'Types and Laying of Minefields'.
(b) Physical Obstacles.
(i) Steep Slopes. Slopes of 50 degrees can stop tanks under normal conditions.
If the slopes are of loose slippery surface, even lesser angel is sufficient.However the slopes must be of sufficient length.
(ii) Vertical Steps. A vertical step of 6 feet can be an effective obstacle against all types of tanks.
(iii) Ditches. A ditch, which is sufficiently wide and deep to make the nose of the tank tilt down so much that it loses hold on
the ground, is an effective obstacle.
(iv) Water. For a river or canal to be an obstacle against tanks it must have depth more than tanks heights and length more
than ¾ of tanks length.
SECTION-5
METHOD OF WATER CROSSING
Ques 1. What are the various kinds of improvised water crossing equipment?
Ans - (a) Groundsheet Water Belt.
(b) Tin Float.
(c) Two Men's Equipment and Groundsheet.
(d) Bamboo Pole
(e) Chattis Water Wings
(f) Water Bottle Belt
(g) Drum Rafts.
(h) Bundle of Logs
(j) Bamboo Mat Raft
(k) Hay Bundle Raft
(l) Charpoy Raft
SECTION-6
USE OF EXPLOSIVES AND IMPROVISED
EXPLOSIVE DEVICE (IED)
Ques 1. What are the main components of IED (improvised explosive device)?
Ans - (a) Explosive.
(b) Detonator.
(c) Initiating Mechanism.
(d) Power Source.
Ques 2, Whre all the IED can be planted?
Ans - (a) Public areas (railway stations, bus stands and airports).
(b) Public Transport (bus, train, aero plane and ship).
(c) Public Utilities (library, offices and Industries).
(d) Military Installations (ammunition dump, fuel oil and lubrication dump and supply depot).
(e) VIP vehicle.
(f) Along road / tracks, where VIP / security forces are likely to move.
(g) Places where large congregations are likely to take place.
(h) Places of religious worship.
(j) Important buildings e.g. Schools, colleges, hospitals and business centre, government
offices etc.
(k) Important bridges.
(l) Historical monuments.
Ques 3 - What are the indications of IED?
Ans - (a) Any unattended item.
(b) Unclaimed attractive items like cell phones, transistor, tape recorder etc.
(c) Any object out of place.
(d) Loose electric wire.
(e) Any antenna wire.
(f) Freshly dug earth.
(g) Dry grass / leaves, cow dung / garbage etc for camouflage.
(h) Broken road or freshly repaired road.
(j) Fresh plaster or painting.
Ques 4 - What are the Do's with IED?
Ans - (a) Remain away from suspected object.
(b) Be aware of booby traps.
(c ) Warn the people about the suspected objects.
(d) Inform police / bomb disposal squad.
(e) Help police in crowd management and traffic control.
(f) Evacuate local population to a safe place.
Ques 5 - What are the Dont's with IED?
Ans - (a) Do not believe unattended object to be safe.
(b) Do not handle suspected object.
(c) Do not panic on detection of IED.
(d) Do not think only one IED has been placed.
(e) Do not immerse suspected object in water.
(f) Do not spread rumours.
(g) Do not bunch up near the suspected object.
(h) Do not cut any wire.
(j) Do not make loud sounds near the IED.
(k) Do not light a fire near IED.
(l) Do not be in a hurry and try to become a dead hero.
SECTION-7
CAMOUFLAGE AND CONCEALMENT
Ques 1. What is the aim of camouflage?
Ans - It is the concealment of man and equipment from enemy's direct and indirect observation.
Ques 2 - What are the various factors which aids recognition?
Ans - (a) Shape
(b) Shadow
(c) Silhouette
(d) Surface
(e) Spacing
(f) Movement
(g) Shine
(h) Position
(i) Contrast
(j) Noise, sound and activity.
Ques 3 - What are the fundamental ways of concealing activities?
Ans - Thse are as uder:-
(a) Hiding. It is complete concealment of an object by placing a screen between the object and the observers.
(b) Blending. It is the arrangement of camouflage materials on, over and around the object so that it appears to be part of the
surroundings. The aim is to prevent detection of the object by a change in natural appearance of the position.
(c) Deceiving. Deceiving simulates an object or disguises it so that it appears to be different.
SECTION-8
TYPES OF MINE FIELDS
Ques 1 - What are the main functions of mine fields?
Ans (a) Delay and disorganize enemy attack and discourage his entering into our defended
positions.
(b) Force the attacker to select certain approaches or routes thereby luring him into a place where he can be killed.
(c) Separate infantry from tanks.
(d) Deny close observation of main defences.
Ques 2 - What are the type of mine fields as per technical considerations?
Ans - (a) Anti Personnel. Containing only anti personnel mines and providing protection only against an infantry attack.
(b) Anti Tank. Containing only anti tank mines and providing protection only against an armoured attack.
(c) Mixed. Containing both anti tank and anti personnel mines and providing protection against both infantry and armoured attack.
Ques 3. What are the tactical classification of the mine fields?
Ans - (a) Protective.
(b) Defensive.
(c) Tactical.
(e) Nuisance.
(f) Dummy.
SECTION-9
FIELD DEFENCES
Ques 1. What points should be borne in mind while constructing field defences?
Ans - (a) Fire trenches should be close enough for the section commanders orders to be heard during battle.
(b) Reverse slopes are a great aid to concealment and surprise, provided the field of fire is sufficient.
(c) With the increasing efficiency of airburst missiles overhead protection is important but needs good concealment and sound
construction.
(d) In open country, crawl trenches may have to be dug to allow movement between fire trenches.
Ques 2. What are the various field fortifications?
Ans - (a) Bunker
(b) Communication Trench.
(c) Fire Trench.
(d) Pill Box.
(e) Shelter Trench
(f) Slit Trench
(g) Weapon Pit
NCC Song
NCC SONG LYRICS (Hindi)
हम सब भारतीय हैं, हम सब भारतीय हैं.

अपनी मंज़िऱ एक है, हा हा हा एक है , हो हो हो एक है.
हम सब भारतीय हैं.
कश्मीर की धरती रानी है , सरताज हहमाऱय है ,

सदियों से हमने इस को अपने खन
ू से पाऱा है .
िे श की रऺा की खाततर हम शमशीर उठा ऱेंग,े
हम शमशीर उठा ऱें गे.
बबखरे -बबखरे तारे हैं हम, ऱेककन झिऱममऱ एक है ,

हा हा हा एक है, हो हो हो एक है,
हम सब भारतीय है.
मॊहिर, गुरूद्वारे भी हैं यहाॉ, और मस्जजि भी है यहाॉ,

गगररजा का है घड़ियाऱ कह ं मुल्ऱा की कह ं है अजां
एक ह अपना राम हैं, एक ह अल्ऱाह ताऱा है ,
एक ह अल्ऱाह ताऱा हैं.
रॊ ग बबरॊ गे िीऩक हैं हम, ऱेककन जगमग एक है ,

हा हा हा एक है, हो हो हो एक है.
हम सब भारतीय हैं, हम सब भारतीय हैं
NCC song Lyrics (English)

Hum Sab Bharatiya Hain, Hum Sab Bharatiya Hain
Apni Manzil Ek Hai,

Ha, Ha, Ha, Ek Hai,
Ho, Ho, Ho, Ek Hai.
Hum Sab Bharatiya Hain.
Kashmir Ki Dharti Rani Hai,

Sartaj Himalaya Hai,
Saadiyon Se Humne Isko Apne Khoon Se Pala Hai
Desh Ki Raksha Ki Khatir Hum Shamshir Utha Lenge,
Hum Shamshir Utha Lenge.
Bikhre Bikhre Taare Hain Hum Lekin Jhilmil Ek Hai,

Ha, Ha, Ha, Ek Hai
Hum Sab Bharatiya Hai.
Mandir Gurudwaare Bhi Hain Yahan

Aur Masjid Bhi Hai Yahan
Girija Ka Hai Ghariyaal Kahin
Mullah ki Kahin Hai Ajaan
Ek Hee Apna Ram Hain, Ek hi Allah Taala Hai,

Ek Hee Allah Taala Hain, Raang Birange Deepak Hain Hum,
lekin Jagmag Ek Hai, Ha Ha Ha Ek Hai, Ho Ho Ho Ek Hai.
Hum Sab Bharatiya Hain, Hum Sab Bharatiya Hain.

NCC English Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NCC English Notes

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NCC English Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part I (Common Syllabus)

General and NCC Scheme

Ans - Unity & Discipline.

Ques 2 – What are the aims of NCC?

Ques 2 – What is the rank of Dy Director General of NCC Directorate?

Ques 3 – How many Directorates are there in NCC?

Ques – 4 - What are the ranks of SD/SW ANOs?

Ans – Lt, Capt & Maj.

Ques – 5 - What are the ranks of JD/JW ANOs?

Ques 1. Name various camps conducted in NCC?

Ans - Basically there are two types of camps as under : -

(a) Annual Training camps

(b) Centrally organised camps, which are a under: -

(i) Leadership camps – Advance & Basic leadership camps

(ii) Thal Sainik camps

(iii) Vayu Sainik Camps.

(iv) Rock climbing camps.

(v) National integration camps.

(vi) Republic day camp and Prime Minister‟s rally.

Ques 2 - Name the social service and community development activities?

Ans – These are as under: -

(a) Tree Plantation.

(b) Blood Donation.

(d) Adult Education.

(e) Community work.

(f) Disaster relief.

(g) AIDs and Cancer awareness programmes.

Ans – These are as under: -

(a) „A‟ Certificate

(ii) Must have attended one Annual Training Camp.

(ii) Must have attended one Annual Training Camp/NIC.

(iii) Cadets possessing „A‟ certificate will be awarded 10 bonus marks

(iv) An Air Wing Cadet must do a minimum of 10 Glide Launches.

(i) The candidate must be in possession of Certificate „B‟.

(ii) The cadet must be in third year of SD/SW NCC Training.

(aa) RD Camp at Delhi (RDC).

(ab) Centrally Organised Camp (COC).

(ac) Para Training Camp (PTC).

(ae) All India Trekking Expedition (DG NCC organised).

(af) All India Mountaineering Expedition (DG NCC organised).

(ag) Attachment Training with Service units.

(ah) Any one of the Adventure Courses approved by DG NCC.

(al) Special Services Camps (essentially with 50% Service training).

(am) Successfully done Scuba Diving Course.

(an) Youth Exchange Programme.

(ao) Foreign cruise (Navy).

(a) Grading `A‟ - Cadets obtaining 80% marks or above.

Ques 5. Name the retention clothing items and scales of authorisation?

Ans - Authorisation of retention clothing for army boys/Girls is tabulated as under: -

Ser Item Life in Qty Auth per Qty to be retained Remarks

Ques 6. Write the full version of NCC song?

Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain, Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain.

Hum Sab Bhartiya Hain

Kashmir Ki Dharti Rani Hai,

Sartaj Himalaya Hai,

Sadiyon Se Hamne Isko Apne Khoon Se Pala Hai

Desh Ki Raksha Ki Khatir, Hum Shamshir Utha Lenge,

Hum Shamshir Utha Lenga.

Bikhere-Bikhere Tarey Hain Hum Lekin Jhilmil Ek Hai